Skip to main content

Full text of "Text-book of mechanics"

See other formats


UNIVERSITY  OF  TORONTO 

DEPARTMENT  OF  CIVIL 

Municipal  and    Structural 


IN  PR E PAR A  TION 

TEXT-BOOK    OF    MECHANICS 

BY 

LOUIS  A.    MARTIN,   JR. 

VOL.  II 
KINEMATICS   AND  KINETICS 


TEXT-BOOK 

OF 


MECHANICS 


¥     BY 

LOUIS   A.    MARTIN,    JR. 

(M.  E.,  STEVENS^  A.  M.,  COLUMBIA) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Mathematics  and  Mechanics  in 

Stevens  Institute  of  Technology 


VOL.  I. 
STATICS 


FIRST    EDITION 
FIRST   THOUSAND 


NEW  YORK 

JOHN   WILEY    &    SONS 

LONDON:   CHAPMAN  &  HALL,  LIMITED 

1906 


3  A 
907 


V'  1 


COPYRIGHT,  1906 

BY 

LOUIS  A.  MARTIN,  JR. 


LIBRARY 


757062 

UNIVERSITY  OF  TORONTO 


ROBERT   DRUMMOND,    PRINTER,    NEW   YORK 


UNIVERSITY  op  TORONTO 

<T  Of  CIVIL  EN6IN&6BING 
Municipal   tqd    Structural 


PREFACE 


Answers  to. the  examples  given  in  this  book  will  be 
supplied  to  students  by  the  publishers,  free  of  charge, 
on  the  receipt  of  the  written  order  of  the  instructor. 


01  statics,  me  stuuy  ui  wiiicn  can  auvaiuageuusiy  oe 
begun  with  such  knowledge  of  mathematics  as  is  re- 
quired for  admission  to  most  Colleges  and  all  Technical 
Schools.  The  elements  of  Analytical  Geometry  are  intro- 
duced as  the  treatment  of  the  subject  requires,  but  no 
Calculus  is  used  in  the  first  volume. 

The  second  volume,  the  MS.  of  which  is  nearly  ready, 
will  treat  of  Kinematics  and  Kinetics.  In  this  volume 
extensive  use  will  be  made  of  the  Calculus. 

Thus,  while  studying  Mechanics,  the  student  becomes 
acquainted  with  a  use  to  w^hich  pure  mathematics,  as 
now  taught  in  our  schools,  may  be  put.  Starting  with 
a  knowledge  of  Algebra,  Geometry,  and  Trigonometry, 

in 


907 


LIBKAKY 

7S7062 

UNIVERSITY  OF  TORONTO 


ROBERT   DRUMMOND,    PRINTER,    NEW   YORK 


UNIVERSITY  of  TORONTO 

.T  OP   CIVIL  ENSINifcBING 
Municipal  md    Structural 


PREFACE 


THE  Text-book  of  Mechanics,  of  which  this  is  the 
first  volume,  is  designed  as  an  introductory  course  to 
Applied  or  Technical  Mechanics  for  Technical  Schools 
and  Colleges.  It  is  based  upon  notes  prepared  for  the 
use  of  the  Freshman  and  Sophomore  classes  at  Stevens 
Institute  of  Technology. 

At  the  same  time  an  attempt  has  been  made  to 
produce  a  graded  course  in  the  application  of  mathe- 
matics. With  this  end  in  view  the  first  volume  treats 
of  Statics,  the  study  of  which  can  advantageously  be 
begun  with  such  knowledge  of  mathematics  as  is  re- 
quired for  admission  to  most  Colleges  and  all  Technical 
Schools.  The  elements  of  Analytical  Geometry  are  intro- 
duced as  the  treatment  of  the  subject  requires,  but  no 
Calculus  is  used  in  the  first  volume. 

The  second  volume,  the  MS.  of  which  is  nearly  ready, 
will  treat  of  Kinematics  and  Kinetics.  In  this  volume 
extensive  use  will  be  made  of  the  Calculus. 

Thus,  while  studying  Mechanics,  the  student  becomes 
acquainted  with  a  use  to  which  pure  mathematics,  as 
now  taught  in  our  schools,  may  be  put.  Starting  with 
a  knowledge  of  Algebra,  Geometry,  and  Trigonometry, 

iii 


IV  PREFACE 

he  at  once  puts  them  to  practical  use,  and  it  is  designed 
to  have  this  application  keep  pace  with  his  advancing 
knowledge  of  pure  mathematics. 

Throughout  it  is  aimed  to  make  the  book  a  teachable 
one.  As  a  course  in  Mechanics  should  primarily  fit  the 
student  to  solve  its  problems,  numerous  examples  and 
many  exercises  are  introduced  to  illustrate  each  principle 
as  developed. 

Of  the  two  hundred  and  fifty-five  problems  contained 
in  this  volume  many  are  to  be  found  in  most  books  on 
Mechanics;  some  have  been  especially  prepared,  while 
others  have  been  selected  from  examinations  set  at 
Stevens. 

As  regards  the  subject-matter  in  a  book  of  this 
nature  nothing  new  can  be  expected.  My  only  claim  to 
originality  lies  in  the  presentation.  Should  any  errors 
be  found  in  the  work,  I  shall  esteem  it  a  favor  to  be 
informed  of  them. 

In  concluding,  I  would  here  express  my  thanks  to 
my  wife,  Alwynne  B.  Martin,  for  her  aid  in  preparing 
the  MS.  and  in  reading  the  proof. 

Louis  A.  MARTIN,  Jr. 

HOBOKEN,  N.  J.,  March,  1906. 


CONTENTS 


INTRODUCTION 

PAGE 

Mechanics,  Kinematics,  Dynamics,  Statics,  Kinetics 1 

Motion,  Velocity,  Acceleration 1 

Exercises  1  to  6 2 

Matter,  Mass 4 

Momentum 5 

Exercise  7 5 

Force 5 

Gravitational  Units  of  Force  and  Mass 7 

Examples 8 

Exercises  8  to  1 1 ..  9 


STATICS 
ANALYTICAL  STATICS 

CHAPTER  I 
FORCES  ACTING  AT  A  SINGLE  POINT 

SECTION   I 

Triangle  of  Forces 

Representation  of  a  Force 13 

Principle  of  the  Triangle  of  Forces 14 

Action  of  Supports 14 

Examples 16 

Exercises  12  to  21 ..  19 


VI  CONTENTS 

SECTION  II 
Components.     Composition  of  Forces 


PAGE 


Resolution  of  Forces,  Components 21 

Exercises  22  to  26 22 

Example 22 

Exercises  27  to  30 23 

Composition  of  Forces 24 

Exercises  31  to  85. .  25 


SECTION   III 

Conditions  for  Equilibrium 

Conditions  for  Equilibrium 26 

Example 27 

Exercises  36  to  40 '. 29 

SECTION   IV 

Statical  Friction 

Friction 30 

Direction  in  which  Friction  Acts 30 

Coefficient  of  Friction 31 

Exercises  4!  and  42 32 

Angle  of  Friction 33 

Total  Reaction  of  a  Surface 34 

Example 34 

Exercises  43  to  50 37 

SECTION  v 
Moments 

Arm  of  a  Force 38 

Moment  of  a  Force 38 

Exercises  51  to  64 39 

Varignon's  Theorem  of  Moments 40 

Condition  for  Equilibrium 41 

Example 42 

Exercises  56  to  58. .  42 


CONTENTS  Vll 

CHAPTER  II 
FORCES  ACTING  ON  A  RIGID  BODY 

SECTION    VI 

Resultant  of  Two  Forces.     Couples 

PAGE 

Rigid  Body 43 

Transmissibility  of  a  Force 43 

Resultant  of  Two  Non-parallel  Forces 44 

Resultant  of  Two  Parallel  Forces 44 

Exercises  59  to  6 '4 45 

Couple 46 

Moment  of  a  Couple 47 

Translation  of  a  Couple 48 

Rotation  of  a  Couple 49 

Equivalent  Couples 50 

Resultant  of  Couples 50 

Exercises  65  and  66 50 

Resultant  of  a  Force  and  a  Couple 51 

Exercise  67 51 

SECTION   VII 

Resultant  of  any  Number  of  Forces 

Resultant  of  Any  Number  of  Forces 51 

Exercises  68  to  70 54 

SECTION   VIII 

Conditions  for  Equilibrium 

Rotation  and  Translation 55 

The  Cause  of  Rotation  and  Translation 56 

Conditions  for  Equilibrium,  First  Method 56 

Example 57 

Exercises  71  to  77 58 

Conditions  for  Equilibrium,  Second  Method 59 

Example 59 

Exercise  78...  60 


Viii  CONTENTS 

PAGE 

Relation  between  Three  Forces  Acting  on  a  Body 60 

Example 61 

Exercises  79  to  84 62 

SECTION   IX 

Parallel  Forces.     Centroids  or  Centers  of  Gravity 

Resultant  of  Parallel  Forces 63 

Exercises  85  and  86 65 

Centroids  or  Centers  of  Gravity 66 

Examples 66 

Exercises  87  to  92 68 

SECTION   X 

Summary  of  the  Methods  of  Statics 

Forces  Acting  at  a  Point 69 

Forces  Applied  to  a  Body 70 

Choice  of  Equations  Used  in  the  Solution  of  a  Problem 70 

Example 70 

Exercises  93  to  96,.  72 


CHAPTER  III 

APPLICATIONS  OF    THE    PRINCIPLES    OF    STATICS  TO 
THE  SIMPLE  MACHINES 

SECTION    XI 

The  Lever  and  the  Wheel  and  Axle 

Machines 73 

Mechanical  Advantage 73 

Simple  Machines 73 

The  Lever 74 

Example 74 

Exercises  97  to  101 75 

The  Balance 75 

Exercises  102  to  104 76 

The  Common  or  Roman  Steelyard 76 

Example 76 

Exercise  105,  .  78 


CONTENTS  IX 

PAGE 

The  Danish  Steelyard 78 

Exercise  106 78 

The  Wheel  and  Axle 79 

Exercises  107  to  109 79 

SECTION   XII 

The  Pulley 

The  Fixed  Pulley 80 

Example 80 

Exercises  110  and  111 81 

The  Movable  Pulley 82 

Example 82 

Exercise  112 82 

Systems  of  Pulleys 83 

Example 83 

Exercises  113  to  120 84 

SECTION   XIII 

The  Inclined  Plane  and  the  Wedge 

The  Inclined  Plane 85 

Exercises  121  to  126 86 

The  Wedge  without  Friction 87 

Example 87 

Exercises  127  to  129 88 

The  Wedge  including  Friction 88 

Example 88 

Exercises  ISO  and  131 90 

SECTION   XIV 

Miscellaneous  Machines 

The  Bent-lever  Balance 91 

Exercises  132  to  134 91 

The  Differential  Wheel  and  Axle 92 

Exercise  135 93 

The  Platform  Scale 93 

Exercise  136 93 

l"he  Knee 93 

Exercises  187  to  139 94 


CONTENTS 


GRAPHICAL  STATICS 

CHAPTER  IV 
GRAPHICAL  ARITHMETIC 

SECTION   XV 

Summation,  Division,  and  Multiplication 

PAGE 

Graphical  Arithmetic 95 

Laws  of  Signs 95 

Summation 96 

Exercises  140  and  14! 96 

Multiplication  and  Division 96 

Examples 97 

Exercises  142  to  145 97 

Example 98 

Exercises  146  to  148 99 

SECTION   XVI 

Combined  Multiplication  and  Summation 

Multiplication  and  Summation 100 

Exercises  149  to  152 102 

Application  to  the  Finding  of  Centroids 102 

Example 102 

Exercises  153  and  154 104 

CHAPTER  V 
FORCES  ACTING  AT  A  SINGLE  POINT 

SECTION   XVII 

Components.     Resultants 

Resultant  by  the  Parallelogram  of  Forces 105 

Resultant  by  the  Triangle  of  Forces 106 

Exercise  155 107 

Components 107 

Exercises  156  to  158. .  .  107 


CONTENTS  XI 

PAGE 

Polygon  of  Forces 108 

Exercises  159  to  163 109 

SECTION   XVIII 

Conditions  for  Equilibrium 

Conditions  for  Equilibrium 109 

Example 110 

Exercises  164  to  171 HI 

Three  Forces  Acting  on  a  Body 112 

Exercises  172  to  174 112 

CHAPTER  VI 
FORCES  ACTING  ON  A  RIGID  BODY 

SECTION   XIX 

Resultants 

Resultants  by  Parallelogram  of  Forces 113 

Resultants  by  Triangle  of  Forces 114 

Exercise  175 114 

Resultant  by  Funicular  Polygon 115 

Exercises  176  to  179 117 

SECTION   XX 

Conditions  for  Equilibrium 

Conditions  for  Equilibrium 117 

Examples 119 

Exercises  180  to  188 122 

CHAPTER  VII 
APPLICATIONS  TO  STRUCTURES 

SECTION   XXI 

Stresses  in  Members  of  Framed  Structures 

Applied  or  External  and  Internal  Forces 123 

Structures,  Framed  and  Non-framed 123 

Example 124 

Exercises  189  to  194 .127 


Xll  CONTENTS 


SECTION   XXII 

The  Funicular  Polygon  for  Parallel  Forces  Considered  as  a  Moment 

Diagram 

PAGE 

Bending  Moments 127 

Moment  Diagram 129 

Exercises  195  to  200.  .  .129 


SECTION    XXIII 

Graphical  Method  for  Finding  Centroids 

Graphical  Method  for  Finding  the  Centroids  of  Laminae 130 

Example 130 

Exercises  201  and  202 131 

APPENDIX 

APPLICATION  OF  TWO-DIMENSIONAL  METHODS  TO  FINDING  STRESSES 
IN  THREE-DIMENSIONAL  STRUCTURES 

Example 133 

Exercises  203  and  204 134 

Example 135 

Exercises  205  to  209 136 

PROBLEMS  FOR  REVIEW 
Exercises  210  to  255..  .   137  to  142 


UNIVERSITY  OF  TORONTO 

DEPARTMENT  OF  CIVIL  ENGINEE 

Municipal  and    Structural 


TEXT-BOOK  OF  MECHANICS 


INTRODUCTION 

THAT  branch  of  physics  which  is  the  simplest  and  also 
the  oldest  and  which  is  usually  treated  as  introductory 
to  the  other  branches  of  this  science  is  called  Mechanics. 

Mechanics  treats  of  the  motions  of  bodies  and  the 
equilibrium  of  forces. 

It  is  divided  into  Kinematics  and  Dynamics. 

Kinematics  treats  of  the  motions  of  bodies  without 
reference  to  the  forces  producing  these  motions  or  to 
the  masses  moved. 

Dynamics  is  that  branch  of  Mechanics  which  treats  of 
the  equilibrium  of  forces  and  the  motions  of  bodies  under 
the  action  of  forces.  It  is  accordingly  subdivided  into 
two  parts, — Statics  and  Kinetics. 

Statics  treats  of  the  equilibrium  of  forces. 

Kinetics  treats  of  the  motions  of  bodies  as  related  to 
the  forces  producing  these  motions  and  to  the  masses 
moved. 

Motion  is  change  of  position. 

Velocity  is  the  rate  of  change  of  position. 


2  TEXT-BOOK  OF   MECHANICS 

Acceleration  is  the  rate  of  change  of  velocity. 

By  rate  of  change  is  meant  the  total  change  divided 
by  the  time  occupied  in  making  the  change,  provided  the 
change  progresses  uniformly. 

Thus,  the  population  of  a  town  in  1890  was  1500,  in 
1900  it  was  4000;  to  find  the  rate  at  which  the  popula- 
tion changed  we  have: 

Total  change    4000  —  1 500 

Rate  of  change = ^r~ 

Time  10 

=  250  persons  per  year. 

A  body  which  moves  uniformly  over  a  space  of  60  feet 

60 
in  5  seconds  changes  its  position  at  the  rate  of  —  =12  feet 

0 

per  second. 

The  velocity  of  a  uniformly  moving  body  is  therefore 

calculated  thus:   velocity  =  -r .     In  algebraic  language 

this  is  expressed,  v=— ,  where  velocity,  space,  and  time 
are  denoted  by  their  initial  letters. 

EXERCISE  i.  If  a  body  moves  144  feet  in  3  seconds,  what 
is  its  velocity? 

EXERCISE  2.  A  body  moves  with  a  uniform  velocity  of  40 
miles  and  1600  yards  per  hour;  what  is  its  velocity  in  feet 
per  second,  and  how  many  feet  will  it  traverse  in  10  seconds? 

EXERCISE  3.  A  railway-train  explodes  two  torpedoes  which 
are  placed  on  the  rails  176  feet  apart.  Two  seconds  of  time 
elapse  between  the  explosions.  Compare  the  velocity  during 
that  interval  with  the  mean  velocity,  which  is  indicated  by  the 
statement  that  the  train  takes  an  hour  and  a  half  to  perform 
the  journey  between  two  stations  45  miles  apart. 


INTRODUCTION  3 

If  the  velocity  of  a  moving  body  changes,  the  rate  oj 
change  of  velocity  is  called  its  "  acceleration."  Thus,  if 
a  moving  body  has  a  velocity  of  20  feet  per  second  at 
one  point  of  its  path,  and  this  velocity  increases  uni- 
formly so  that  3  seconds  later  its  velocity  is  50  feet  per 

second,  its  acceleration  is  —     —  =10  feet-per-second  per 

o 
second. 

This  shows  that 

Change  in  velocity 
Acceleration  — 


Time  required  to  produce  change' 

'U2  —  'Ui 

or  a  =  —     — • ,  where  v2  and  Vi  are  the  velocities  of  the 

/2-/l 

body  at  the  times  /2  and  ti  respectively. 

Acceleration,  being  measured  by  the  velocities  im- 
parted per  second,  is  stated  in  terms  of  feet-per-second 
per  second. 

EXERCISE  4.  A  body  starts  from  rest  with  an  acceleration 
of  2  feet-per-second  per  second.  When  will  it  have  a  velocity 
of  1000  feet  per  second  ? 

EXERCISE  5.  The  velocity  of  a  body  decreases  during  10 
seconds  from  10  feet  per  second  to  7  feet  per  second.  What 
is  its  acceleration? 

EXERCISE  6.  A  body  is  made  to  record  its  own  velocity, 
which  shows  that  at  a  certain  instant  it  is  moving  at  the  rate 
of  112  feet  per  second;  but  after  an  interval  of  1/20  second 
its  velocity  is  114  feet  per  second.  What  is  its  acceleration? 

From  the  above  it  will    be  noticed  that  the  unit  of 

velocity  is  obtained  from  the  formula  v=—,  by  placing 

t 

s  =  i  foot  and  /  =  i  second;  thus,  v  =  —  =i  foot  per  second. 


4  /TEXT-BOOK    OF   MECHANICS 

This  may  be  stated  thus:  A  body  has  Unit  Velocity  when 
it  traverses  uniformly  a  unit  of  distance  in  a  unit  of 
time. 

Similarly,    the   unit   of   acceleration   is   derived   from 

a =-2—    -  by  placing  v2  —  Vi  =  i    foot  per  second   and 
fe— *i 

/2_/1  =  I    second;     thus,    a=—  =  i    foot-per- second    per 

second;  or,  A  body  has  Unit  Acceleration  when  its 
velocity  increases  uniformly  by  a  unit  of  velocity  in  a 
unit  of  time. 

This  method  of  deriving  units  will  be  found  of  uni- 
versal application. 

Matter  is  the  material  of  which  bodies  are  composed. 

A  Body  is  a  limited  portion  of  matter. 

Mass  is  the  scientific  name  for  a  quantity  of  matter. 

We  can  recognize  in  bodies  a  property  which  depends 
partly  on  their  size  and  partly  on  the  substance  of  which 
they  are  composed.  Thus,  if  we  take  two  balls  of  iron 
of  considerably  different  sizes  and  hang  them  up  by  long 
strings  of  the  same  length,  a  very  slight  effort  is  suffi- 
cient to  give  considerable  motion  to  the  small  ball,  while 
a  strong  push  is  necessary  to  displace  appreciably  the 
large  ball.  These  balls  are  said  to  differ  in  mass. 

A  heavy  fly-wheel,  properly  mounted  on  ball-bearings, 
continues  to  rotate  for  a  long  time  when  set  in  motion; 
much  effort,  however,  is  required  to  either  stop  it  or  to 
start  it  when  at  rest.  The  fly-wheel  is  said  to  have  mass, 
and  the  greater  the  mass  the  greater  the  effort  required 
to  stop  it  in  a  given  time. 

These  and  similar  observations  lead  us  to  recognize 


INTRODUCTION  5 

that  property  of  bodies  to  which  the  name  of  "Mass" 
has  been  given. 

The  Unit  of  Mass  is  the  mass  of  a  certain  lump  of 
platinum  marked  "P.  S.,  1844,  i  Ib."  (P.  S.  being  the 
abbreviation  of  Parliamentary  Standard). 

Momentum. — Observation  leads  us  to  recognize  a 
quantity  which  depends  upon  both  the  mass  of  a  body 
and  its  velocity.  Two  bodies  of  equal  mass  moving  with 
equal  and  opposite  velocities  will  on  impact  (collision) 
come  to  rest.  If,  however,  the  masses  are  unequal  or 
their  velocities  different,  the  result  of  impact  is  not  rest. 
The  motion  which  a  given  body  can  communicate  by 
impact  to  another  body  depends  upon  this  quantity, 
which  we  call  "Momentum." 

The  momentum  of  a  body  is  the  product  of  its  mass 
and  its  velocity,  or 

Momentum  =  mXv. 

The  Unit  of  Momentum  is  the  momentum  of  a  mass 
of  i  pound  moving  with  a  velocity  of  i  foot  per  second. 

EXERCISE  7.  A  baseball  of  5  oz.  mass  has  a  horizontal 
velocity  of  66  feet  per  second.  A  blow  causes  it  to  travel 
back  on  the  same  line  with  a  velocity  of  62  feet  per  second. 
Find  the  change  of  momentum. 

Momentum  is  a  fundamental  property  of  a  moving 
body.  If  we  observe  the  motions  of  bodies,  we  will  find 
but  few  cases  in  nature  in  which  the  velocity  is  uniform: 
bodies  generally  have  acceleration.  This  leads  us  to 
consider  change  in  momentum.  That  which  changes 
the  momentum  of  a  body  is  called  "Force." 

Force  is  measured  by  the  rate  of  change  of  momentum, 
or 


6  TEXT- BOOK   OF   MECHANICS 

Change  of  momentum 
Force  =  ^r—        — ; — TT—          — . 
Time  required  for  change 

m  X change  of  velocity       m(v2  —  vi) 

J~f  -—         -  M.. .,,         I  ....  !—     .  — -          .  * 

Time  required  for  change        t2  —  h 

V2  —  Vi 

but  —  =  acceleration  =  a. 

h-h 

Therefore  F  =  mXa. 

The  Force  acting  on  any  mass  is  equal  to  the  product 
of  the  mass  by  the  acceleration  produced  by  the  force. 

The  Unit  of  Force  is  called  the  "Poundal,"  and  is  that 
force  which  when  acting  upon  a  mass  of  i  pound  pro- 
duces an  acceleration  of  i  foot-per-second  per  second  for 
F=mXa  =  iXi=i  poundal. 

m(v2 — ^i) 

From  the  formula  F  =  —  -it  will  be  noticed  that 

t2-ti 

F(t2  —  ti)=m(v2  —  Vi),  or  Force  multiplied  by  the  time 
during  which  it  acts  equals  the  change  of  momentum 
produced. 

The  product  Ffa  —  h)  is  called  Impulse. 

.".  Impulse  =  change  of  momentum. 

It  has  been  experimentally  demonstrated  that  any  body 
near  the  earth's  surface  falls  with  a  sensibly  constant 
acceleration,  usually  denoted  by  g.  This  means  that  the 
velocity  of  the  body,  and  therefore  its  momentum,  is 
changing.  In  the  light  of  what  has  been  said  we  should 
say  that  a  force  is  acting  on  the  body. 

This  force  is  known  as  " Weight"  and  is  the  result  of 
the  attraction  which  the  earth  exercises  on  all  bodies  in 
accordance  with  the  law  of  gravitation. 


INTRODUCTION  7 

Thus,  if  w  represents  the  weight  of  a  body  whose  mass 
is  m  and  as 

Force  =  mass  X  acceleration, 

we  have  w  =  mXg. 

As  g  is  approximately  equal  to  32  feet-per-second  per 
second,  the  weight  of  a  body  whose  mass  is,  say,  10  Ib. 
equals 

10X32=320  poundals. 

In  engineering  practice  it  is  not  usual  to  use  the  abso- 
lute unit  of  force, — the  poundal.  Instead,  forces  are 
measured  in  terms  of  the  weight  of  some  given  body, 
usually  the  weight  of  the  standard  of  mass, — i  pound. 
Thus,  when  in  practice  we  speak  of  a  force  p  we  do 
not  mean  a  force  of  p  poundals,  but  a  force  p  times  as 
great  as  the  weight  of  i  pound.  Such  a  unit  is  known 
as  a  gravitational  unit  oj  force. 

If  we  wish  to  use  as  the  unit  of  force  the  weight  of  a 
mass  of  i  pound,  as  before  denned,  and  still  retain  the 
equation  Iw  =  mg1  which  is  a  necessary  deduction  from 
the  laws  of  mechanics,  we  must  change  the  unit  of  mass. 

The  necessity  of  this  change  becomes  evident  from  the 

w 
equation  m=— ,   which  gives  m  =  i   only  upon  making 

o 

w  =  g.    The  new  unit  of  mass  is  then  the  mass  of  a  body 

possessing  g  times  the  weight  of  the  original  unit  of  mass. 

If,  then,  we  speak  of  a  mass  of  5^  Ib.,  we  mean  a  mass 

possessing  5^  times  the  weight  of  the  original  unit  of 

t  (7 

mass,  or  it  contains  --  (  =  5)  times  the  new  unit  of  mass, 

o 

and  is  therefore  a  mass  of  5  units. 


8  TEXT-BOOK    OF    MECHANICS 

As,  by  definition,  a  poundal  is  that  force  which  acting 
on  a  mass  of  i  Ib.  produces  an  acceleration  of  i  foot-per- 
second  per  second,  and  as  we  observe  in  the  case  of  fall- 
ing bodies  that  a  force  equal  to  the  weight  of  i  pound  of 
mass  acting  upon  a  mass  of  i  pound*  produces  an  accel- 
eration of  g  feet-per-second  per  second,  the  force  equal 
to  the  weight  of  i  pound  of  mass  must  equal  g  poundals. 
This  is  expressed  more  compactly  as  follows:  i  pound  = 
g  poundals. 

In  the  Absolute  System  of  Units  the  unit  of  mass  is  fun- 
damental, and  the  unit  of  force  is  derived. 

In  the  Gravitational  System  of  Units  we  assume  the 
unit  of  force  and  then  derive  the  unit  of  mass 
from  it. 

Example. — A  force  of  10  Ib.  acts  upon  a  weight  of 
20  Ib.  for  5  seconds.  Find  the  change  of  momentum 
produced  and  the  mass  of  the  moving  body  in  gravita- 
tional units. 

Solution. — We  have  the  law  Ft  =  mv. 

.'.  The  change  of  momentum  =  w^  =  .F/==(io)  (5)=  50 
units  of  momentum. 

The  moving  body  has  a  weight  of  20  Ib. ;  one  unit  of 
mass  has  a  weight  of  g  Ib.  .".  The  mass  of  the  moving 

20 
body  is  —  units  of  mass. 

o 

It  should  be  observed  that  no  specific  name  has  been 
assigned  to  either  the  unit  of  momentum  or  the  unit  of 
mass. 

Example. — What  velocity  would  a  mass  of  64  pounds 
acquire  in  10  seconds  if  acted  on  by  a  force  of  4  pounds? 
(#  =  32  ft.-per-sec.  per  sec.) 

Solution. — Find  first  the  acceleration  produced  by  the 


INTRODUCTION  9 

force  by  means  of  the  formula  F  =  ma,  wherein  F  =  ^ 

pounds  and  m  =  —  =2  units  of  mass. 
32 

Thus,  a  =  —  =  2  ft.-per-sec.  per  sec. 

As  the  acquired  velocity  will  be  the  change  in  velocity 
and  as  the  acceleration  is  the  rate  of  change  of  velocity, 
we  have 

v 

2=  —  .     .*.  v  =  20  ft.  per  sec. 
10 

The  following  exercises  should  be  solved  in  gravita- 
tional units. 

EXERCISE  8.  A  mass  of  100  pounds  possesses  an  accelera- 
tion of  10  feet-per-sec.  per  sec.  What  force  must  be  acting 
upon  it  ? 

EXERCISE  9.  What  is  the  weigl.t  of  a  mass  on  which  a 
force  of  10  pounds  produces  an  acceleration  of  3  feet-per-sec. 
per  sec.  ? 

EXERCISE  10.  What  force  would  increase  the  velocity  of  a 
3<D-pound  mass  from  — 10  feet  per  sec.  to  30  feet  per  sec.  in  5 
minutes  ? 

EXERCISE  n.  What  acceleration  would  a  force  of  6  pounds 
produce  in  a  mass  of  3  2  units  of  mass  ? 


STATICS 


ANALYTICAL   STATICS 


CHAPTER  I 

FORCES  ACTING  AT  A  SINGLE  POINT 
SECTION  I 

TRIANGLE  OF  FORCES 

Statics  treats  of  the  equilibrium  of  forces. 

When  a  body  is  acted  on  by  forces  which  are  in  equi- 
librium the  body  is  at  rest  or  moves  with  a  constant 
velocity. 

Representation  of  a  Force. — A  force  can  conveniently 
be  represented  by  a  straight  line;  one  end  of  the  line  will 
represent  the  point  of  application  of  the  force,  the  direc- 
tion of  the  line  gives  the  direction  of  the  line  of  action 
of  the  force,  the  number  of  units  of  length  in  the  line 
represents  the  number  of  units  of  force,  while  the  arrow- 
head shows  the  "sense"  of  the  force. 

It  can  be  experimentally  de- 
monstrated that  if  OA  and  OB 
(Fig.  i)  represent  two  forces 
acting  upon  a  particle  O,  the 
diagonal  OC  of  the  parallelo- 
gram constructed  upon  OA  and  OB  represents  in  direc- 


14  ANALYTICAL   STATICS 

tion  and  magnitude  the  resultant  of  the  forces  OA  and 
OB,  or  the  single  force  OC  may  replace  the  forces  OA 
and  OB  without  affecting  the  state  of  the  particle  O. 

If  we  assume  a  force  OC'  (Fig.  2)  equal  in  magnitude, 
but  opposite  in  direction  to  OC,  acting  upon  O  together 
with  OA  and  OB,  it  is  evident. that  equilibrium  of  the 
forces  would  result. 

Let  us  now  start  with  any  one  of  the  forces  OC',  OA, 
OB,  as  OA  (Fig.  2),  and  in  any  order  put  the  remaining 


forces  end  to  end,  being  careful  to  preserve  their  lengths 
and  direction,  and  it  will  be  found  that  a  closed  triangle 
results.  (Prove  this  by  Geometry.)  Therefore, 

//  three  forces  impressed  on  a  particle  are  in  equilibrium, 
they  can  be  represented  in  direction  and  magnitude  by  the 
sides  o)  any  triangle  drawn  so  as  to  have  its  sides  parallel 
to  the  forces. 

Before  applying  this  principle  to  some  examples  we 
will  call  attention  to  the  manner  in  which  the  actions  of 
cords,  planes,  and  supports  in  general  may  be  repre- 
sented by  their  equivalent  forces. 

A  flexible  cord  or  string  is  always  assumed  to  transmit 
any  force  along  its  fibres  in  the  direction  of  its  length. 
If  two  equal  and  opposite  forces  keep  a  string  in  equilib- 
rium, the  string  is  said  to  be  in  tension  and  the  tension  is 


FORCES   ACTING   AT   A   SINGLE    POINT 


Fir,  3 


cons  cant  throughout  its  length.  This  tension  is  meas- 
ured by  the  force  applied  at  either  end.  The  tension  in 
a  cord  passing  over  a  smooth  (frictionless)  peg  or  surface 
is  unaltered.  If  a  string  is  knotted  to  another  string  at 
any  point  of  its  length,  the  tension  will  no  longer  be  the 
same  for  both  portions,  in  fact  we  may  consider  the  two 
portions  as  two  separate  strings. 

The  action  of  a  string  can  thus  always  be  represented 
by  a  force  having  for  direction  the  direction  of  the  string, 
and  this  force  will  measure  the 
tension  to  which  the  string  is 
subjected. 

A  smooth  (frictionless)  plane 
always  exerts  a  force  normal  to 
its  surface.  Thus  in  Fig.  3, 
representing  a  beam  resting  upon  two  smooth  surfaces,  tLe 
arrows  NI  and  N2  represent  the  reactions  of  the  planes. 
|w  If  a  body  rests  upon  a  smooth  peg, 
the  peg  exerts  a  force  normal  to  the 
surface  of  the  body  at  the  point  of 
contact.  This  is  illustrated  in  Fig. 
|  4,  representing  a  beam  resting  upon 
w  a  peg,  P,  and  against  a  smooth  wall, 
WW\  here  S  represents  the  reaction 
of  the  peg,  and  N  the  reaction  of  the  wall. 

A  body  which  has  been  separated  from  all  supports 
and  upon  which  the  reactions  of  the  supports  are  all 
represented  by  their  equivalent  forces  is  called  a  jree 
body.  Of  course  the  action  of  gravity  must  also  be  shown 
as  a  force,  representing  the  weight  of  the  body,  acting 
upon  the  free  body. 

In  statics  it  is  of  the  utmost  importance  always  to 


FIG.  4 


16  ANALYTICAL    STATICS 

represent  the  body  to  which  the  principles  of  equilibrium 
are  to  be  applied  as  a  free  body.  The  greatest  care  must 
be  taken  to  represent  all  the  forces  acting  upon  the  body 
by  their  respective  arrows. 

In  solving  problems  involving  the  above  principles  the 
method  to  be  pursued  may  be  outlined  as  follows: 

(a)  Draw  a  diagrammatic  sketch  to  aid  in  obtaining  a 
clear  conception  of  the  problem. 

(b)  Find  a  point  at  which  three  forces  act  in  equilibrium. 

(c)  Locate  this  point  with  its  impressed  forces,  making 
it  a  "free  body." 

(d)  Construct  the  triangle  of  forces. 

(e)  Apply  your  knowledge  of  mathematics  (Geometry, 
Algebra,  and  Trigonometry)  so  as  to  calculate  the  re- 
quired forces. 

(/)  Interpret  your  answer  so  as  to  obtain  its  mechan- 
ical significance. 

Example. — A  picture  weighing  3  Ib.  hangs  vertically 
from  a  nail  by  a  cord  passing  through  two  rings  in  the 
frame.  The  parts  of  the  string  form  an  equilateral  tri- 
angle. Find  the  tension  of  the  string. 

Solution. — (a)  Fig.  5  illustrates  the  prob- 
lem. 

(6)  At  N  (Fig.  5)  we  have  three  forces 
acting,   the  tensions  of  the  two 
strings  and  the  reaction  of   the 
FlG  5       '  nail,  which  is  equal  to  the  weight 

of  the  picture  and  acts  upward. 
(c)  In  Fig.  6  NC  represents  the  reaction  of 
the  nail,  and  Na(  =  T1)  and  Nb  (  =  T2)  the 
tensions  of  the  strings  NA  and  NB  respect- 
ively.     These  lines  represent  forces  and  are  in  no  way 


FORCES    ACTING    AT   A    SINGLE    POINT 


connected  with  the  lines  in  Fig.  5,  except  by  reason  of 
their  parallelism. 

(d)  Fig.    7    represents    the   corresponding   triangle   of 
forces. 

(e)  It  now  remains  to  calculate  the  values  TI  and  T2 
from  the  triangle  of  forces.     This  may  be  done 

in  many  ways  ;  for  instance,  from  Q  drop  ±QS 
to  PR;  then  as  PQ  =  QR,  PS  =  SR  =  3/2 
(Geometry).  From  APSQ, 


PS 

_ 


3/2 
_ 


ro 
2  =  — 


Ib. 


and 


^3     . 
..(Geometry.) 

(/)  We  thus  arrive  at  the  conclusion  that  the  tensions 
in  the  strings  are  equal,  and  that  in  each  it  equals  1.7  +  Ib. 
This  means  that  if  the  string  is  strong  enough  to 
support  a  weight  of  1.7+  Ib.,  as  indicated  in 
Fig.  8,  it  will  safely  support  the  picture  as  shown 
in  Fig.  5.  -  A 

Example. — A  piece  of  ma- 
chinery weighing  4000  pounds 
is    suspended    by    two    ropes 
making  angles  of  30°  and  45°  with 
the  vertical.      Find  the  ten- 
sions in  the  ropes.  FlG-  9 

Solution. — (a)  Fig.  9  illustrates   the  problem. 

(b)  At  C  we  have  three  forces  acting. 

(c)  Fig.  10  shows  these  forces,  the  unknown 
forces    due  to  the   action   of   the   ropes   being 

denoted  by  R  and  S. 


FIG.  8 


FIG.  10 


1 8  ANALYTICAL    STATICS 

(d)  Fig.  ii  represents  the  triangle  of  forces. 

(e)  To  calculate  the  magnitude  of  the  forces 
R  and  S  note  that  the  angles  between  the  forces 
4000  and  R  and  between  4000  and  S  (Fig.  n) 
are  respectively  equal  to  30°  and  45°.  (Why?) 
Therefore  the  angle  between  the  forces  R  and 
S  becomes  105°.  By  the  law  of  sines  (Trigo- 
FIG.  ii  nometry)  we  have 

S  R  4000 

sin  30°     sin  45°     sin  105' 


/       4000  \ 
\     sin75<>| 


4000  sin  30° 

.'.  S  = : o —  =  2070  pounds, 

sin  75° 

4000  sin  45° 
and  R  = : 5 —  =  2928  pounds. 

sin  75 

(/)  These  results  to  be  interpreted  as  in  the  previous 
example. 

Example. — A  heavy  particle  whose  weight  is  W  pounds 
is  placed  on  a  smooth  (frictionless) 
inclined  plane,  AB.  The  height  of 
the  plane  is  a  and  its  length  is  c 
(Fig.  12).  Find  the  force  acting 
parallel  to  AB  required  to  sustain 
the  particle  upon  the  plane.  Also 
find  the  pressure  exerted  by  the  particle  upon  the 
plane. 

Solution. — (a)  Fig.  12  illustrates  the  problem. 

(&)  Whenever  a  surface  enters  into  a  problem  it  should 
be  remembered  that  there  always  exists  a  normal  reaction 
perpendicular  to  the  surface,  which  in  the  case  of  a  friction- 


FORCES   ACTING.  AT   A    SINGLE    POINT 


less  plane  is  the  only  reaction.     The  particle  then  be- 
comes the  point  at  which  three  forces  act 
in  equilibrium. 

(c)  The  three  forces  are  (Fig.  13): 
ist.  The  weight,  W. 

2d.  The  sustaining  force,  P. 

3d.  The  normal  reaction  of  the  plane, 

(d)  The  triangle  of  forces  is  shown  in  Fig.  14. 

(e)  In  this  example  no  angle  is  given. 
This  precludes  the  use  of  Trigonometry.  On 
due  consideration  it  will  be  noticed  that 
Axyz  is  similar  to  A  ABC,  (why?)  and 
therefore 


FIG.  14 


= 

xy     AB' 


Pa 
or  more  simply  —  =—\     .'.  P  =  W—\ 


also 


W 


(/)  This  shows  us  that  the  force  P  necessary  to  sustain 
the  particle  upon  the  plane  is  less  than  W,  the  weight 
of  the  particle,  for  a<c, 

As  the  reaction  of  the  plane  upon  the  particle  is  N, 
it  follows  that  an  equal  but  opposite  force  must  be  the 
pressure  exerted  by  the  particle  upon  the  plane. 

EXERCISE  12.  A  picture  weighing  7  Ib.  hangs  by  a  cord 
passing  through  two  hooks  and  over  a  small  nail.  The  hooks 
are  18  inches  apart  and  the  cord  is  4  feet  long.  Find  the 
tension  of  the  cord. 


20  ANALYTICAL    STATICS 

EXERCISE  13,  If  the  cord  in  Exercise  12  be  lengthened  to 
6  feet,  how  will  the  tension  in  it  be  altered  ? 

EXERCISE  14.  A  cord  is  stretched  horizontally  between  two 
posts  6  feet  apart.  What  is  the  tension  in  it,  and  how  much 
longer  does  it  become  when  a  7-lb.  weight  suspended  from  its 
middle  makes  it  droop  3  irches? 

EXERCISE  15.  A  particle  weig  ling  10  lb.  is  sustained  upon 
a  smooth  inclined  plane  by  a  force  whose  line  of  action  makes 
an  angle  of  60°  with  the  horizontal.  If  the  angle  of  the  plane 
is  30°,  find  the  sustaining  force. 

EXERCISE  16.  Same  as  preceding  exercise  with  angle  of 
plane  45°  and  angle  between  line  of  action  of  the  force  and 
horizontal  30°. 

EXERCISE  17.  An  inclined  plane  has  a  base  of  4  feet  and  a 
length  of  5  feet.  What  will  be  the  reaction  of  the  plane  upon 
a  particle  whose  weight  is  100  pounds,  if  the  sustaining  force 
be  applied  parallel  to  the  base  of  the  plane  ? 

EXERCISE  18.  A  weight  w  is  supported  on  a  smooth  plane 
inclined  at  an  angle  a  to  the  horizon,  by  means  of  a  force  in- 
clined at  an  angle  0  to  the  plane.  Find  the  magnitude  of  the 
force,  and  the  pressure  on  the  plane.  If  there  is  no  pressure 
on  the  plane,  in  what  direction  does  the  force  act  ? 

EXERCISE  19.  A  man  pushes  a  garden-roller  weighing  80 
pounds  up  a  plank  10  feet  3  inches  long  and  with  one  end 
2  feet  3  inches  above  the  ground.  If  the  handle  is  horizontal, 
find  the  force  applied  and  the  pressure  of  the  roller  on  the 
plank. 

EXERCISE  20.  Two  sticks,  AB  and  BC,  loosely  jointed  at 
A,  rest  upon  horizontal  ground  at  B  and  C,  making  angles  of 
65°  and  40°  respectively  with  the  ground.  If  a  weight  of  200 
pounds  be  suspended  from  A,  find  the  forces  transmitted  by 
the  sticks  to  the  ground. 

EXERCISE  21.  Draw  a  triangle  ABC  with  base  BC  hori- 
zontal and  its  vertex  A  under  BC.  Let  AB  and  AC  be  threads 
fastened  to  two  fixed  points  B  and  C,  and  to  a  third  thread 
at  A.  If  the  third  thread  supports  a  weight  W  and  the  angles 


FORCES    ACTING    AT   A   SINGLE    POINT 


21 


of  the  triangle  are  A,  B,  and  C  respectively,  find  the  tensions 
in  the  threads. 

SECTION  II 

COMPONENTS.     COMPOSITION  OF  FORCES 

WE  have  just  noticed  that  the  triangle  of  forces  gives 
us  an  easy  method  for  calculating  the  relations  existing 
between  three  forces  in  equilibrium. 

For  the  consideration  of  the  equilibrium  of  more  than 
three  forces  another  method  must  be  used.  To  intro- 
duce this,  we  will  first  consider  the 

Resolution  of  Forces 

In  Fig.  15  assume  the  force  R  and  the  lines  of  action 

of  two  other,  unknown  forces  OA  and  OB.     Through  C 

draw   CD\\    to  OA,  and   CE\\  /B 

to    OB.      Let     OD    and    OE 

then    represent    the    forces  Fy 

and  Fx  respectively.       By  the 

parallelogram     of     forces,    Fx 

and 

sultant. 

Fx  and  Fy  are  called  the  Components  of  R;   and  R  is 

said  to  be  resolved  into  the  component  forces  Fx  and  Fy. 
!B  In  case  the  lines  of  action 

of  the  components  OA  and 
OB  are  oblique,  the  analyt- 
ical calculation  of  Fx  and  Fy 
is  not  easily  accomplished. 
To  simplify  the  calculation 

we  shall,   whenever  possible,   assume  OA    and  .OB  at 

right  angles  as  in  Fig.  16.     Then  if  ZCO£  =  0, 


Fy  would   have  R  as  re- 


22  ANALYTICAL   STATICS 


and  Fy  =  Rsmd. 

EXERCISE  22.  A  force  of  100  pounds  acts  at  an  angle  of 
30°  to  the  horizontal.  Resolve  same  into  vertical  and  hori- 
zontal components. 

EXERCISE  23.  Same  as  Exercise  22  if  force  is  inclined  at 
45°  to  the  horizontal. 

For  convenience  we  shall  designate  all  forces  acting 
upward  and  to  the  right  as  plus,  and  therefore  all  forces 
acting  downward  and  to  the  left  as  minus. 

EXERCISE  24.  Resolve  a  force  of  2  tons,  acting  at  an  angle 
of  1  60°  to  the  horizon,  into  vertical  and  horizontal  compo- 
nents. 

EXERCISE  25.  Same  as  Exercise  24,  if  the  line  of  action  of 
the  force  makes  an  angle  of  (a)  270°;  (6)  210°;  (c)  315°  with 
the  horizontal. 

EXERCISE  26.  The  pull  on  the  rope  of  a  canal-boat  is  100 
pounds,  and  the  direction  of  the  rope  makes  an  angle  of  60° 
with  the  parallel  banks.  Find  the  force  urging  the  boat 
forward. 

In  the  propulsion  of  a  canal-boat,  is  a  long  or  a  short  rope 
more  advantageous  ?  Why  ? 

Example.  —  Explain  the  action  of  the  wind  in  propelling 
a  ship. 

Solution.  —  Let  AB,  Fig.  17,  represent  the  direction  of 
the  ship's  keel;  CD  the  position  of  the  sail,  which  we  as- 
sume flat.  Let  the  pressure  of  the  wind  be  equivalent 
to  a  force  P  acting  on  the  sail  in  the  direction  indicated. 
Resolve  the  force  P  into  two  components  T  and  TV",  one 
parallel  to  the  sail  and  the  other  at  right  angles  to  the 
sail.  The  first  component,  T,  produces  little  or  no 


FORCES   ACTING   AT   A    SINGLE    POINT  23 

effect,  and  we  will  neglect  it.  The  component  N  acts 
on  the  ship  through  the  mast.  We  may  resolve  N  into 
the  components  X  and  Y,  parallel  and  at  right  angles 
to  the  keel.  The  resistance  offered  by  the  water  to  a 
motion  in  a  direction  at  right  angles  to  the  keel  is  so 
great  that  the  component  Y  produces  but  little  motion. 
The  ship  is  so  built  that  the  water  may  offer  only  a  small 


FIG.  17 

resistance  to  motion  parallel  to  the  keel,  and  the  ship 
moves  in  this  direction  under  the  action  of  the  force  X. 

EXERCISE  27.  Show  that  a  vessel  may  sail  due  east  against 
a  southeast  wind. 

EXERCISE  28.  If  F  be  the  force  of  the  wind,  a  and  /?  the 
inclinations  of  the  wind  and  sail  to  the  keel  of  a  boat,  find 
the  headway  force  and  the  leeway  force. 

EXERCISE  29.  A  boat  is  sailing  due  west;  the  wind  is  from 
the  northeast.  The  sail  is  set  at  an  angle  of  75°  with  the 
keel  of  the  boat.  Of  the  two  possible  positions  of  the  sail 
select  the  most  advantageous  and  calculate  the  headway  force. 

EXERCISE  30.  A  boat  is  towed  along  the  centre  of  a  canal, 
25  feet  wide,  by  mules  on  each  bank;  the  length  of  each  rope 
is  36  feet.  Find  the  force  exerted  by  each  mule  when  the 
force  urging  the  boat  forward  is  200  pounds, 


24  ANALYTICAL    STATICS 


Composition  of  Forces 

The  method  of  resolving  a  force  into  its  components 
leads  us  to  a  method  of  combining  forces  which  is,  for 

purposes  of   calculation,  much 
more  convenient  than  the  prin- 
ciple  of  the   parallelogram   of 
*/         ^^  forces.      Consider  three  forces 

F,   F",   F'"    all   acting   upon 
the   point   O    and   inclined  to 
the  horizontal  at  angles  0',  0", 
FIG.  I8  0"',     respectively     (Fig.     18). 

From    what    has   preceded    it 

follows  that  each  of  the  three  forces  may  be  replaced  by 
a  horizontal  and  vertical  component,  i.e., 

F      by    F'cosd'         and    F'sin0'; 
F"     by    F"  cos  0"       and    F"  sin  6"  ; 
F"    by    F'"  cos  V"     and    F"  sin  0"'. 

To  simplify  the  notation,  we  shall  designate  F  cos  0' 
by  FX  and  F'  sin  0'  by  Fy,  etc.,  and  therefore  call  the 
horizontal  line  OA  the  axis  of  X,  and  OB  the  axis  of  Y. 

As  Fxr,  Fx",  FX"  all  have  a  common  line  of  action 
(the  axis  of  X),  we  may  add  them  algebraically  to  obtain 
their  resultant, 


similarly,  Ry  =  Fy'  +  Fy"  +  Fy'", 

where  Rx  and  Ry  are  the  x  and  y  components  of  the  re- 
sultant, R,  of  the  three  forces  F,  F" ,  F'" . 


FORCES    ACTING   AT    A    SINGLE    POINT  25 

Fig.  19  shows  how  Rx  and  Ry  may  be  utilized  to  obtain 
the  resultant 


and  the  direction  of  its  line  of  action 

_i  RV 
ct  =  tan  1  •=*. 

RX 

It  should  be  noticed  that  the  argument  just  applied 
would  be  in  nowise  affected  if  the  X  axis  and  the  Y  axis 


FIG.  19 


were  not  horizontal  and  vertical  so  long  as  they  remained 
mutually  perpendicular. 

EXERCISE  31.  Three  forces  of  6,  8,  and  10  pounds  act  on 
a  particle  at  angles  of  120°  to  each  other.  Find  the  resultant 
in  magnitude  and  direction: 

ist.  By  assuming  axis  of  x  coincident  with  force    6; 


2d. 
3d- 


10. 


EXERCISE  32.  ABCDEF  is  a  regular  hexagon.  Find  the 
magnitude  of  the  resultant  of  the  forces  represented  by  AB, 
AC,  AD,  AE,  and  AF.  (Assume  AB  =  a). 

EXERCISE  33.  Three  smooth  pegs  are  driven  into  a  vertical 
wall  and  form  an  equilateral  triangle  whose  base  is  horizontal. 


26  ANALYTICAL    STATICS 

Find  the  pressure  on  each  peg,  if  a  thread,  having  equal 
weights  of  10  pounds  attached  to  its  ends,  be  hung  over  the 
pegs. 

EXERCISE  34.  Three  men  pull  an  iron  ring.  The  first  pulls 
with  a  force  of  100  pounds  in  a  southeasterly  direction,  the 
second  pulls  northeast  with  a  force  of  70  pounds,  and  the 
third  pulls  towards  the  north  with  a  force  of  50  pounds.  In 
which  direction  will  the  ring  move  ? 

EXERCISE  35.  Two  forces  of  20  pounds  each  and  one  of 
21  pounds  act  at  a  point.  The  angle  between  the  first  and 
second  is  120°,  and  between  the  second  and  third  30°.  Find 
the  resultant  in  direction  and  magnitude. 

SECTION  III 
CONDITIONS  FOR  EQUILIBRIUM 

We  know  that  the  resultant  of  any  number  of  forces 
may  be  expressed  by  R=^Rx2  +  Ry2. 

If  a  force  equal  in  magnitude  but  opposite  in  direction 
to  R  is  applied  to  the  body,  it  will  balance  the  original 
forces. 

If  the  original  forces  are  themselves  in  equilibrium,  no 
other  force  is  necessary  to  produce  rest  or  motion  with 
constant  velocity,  and  their  resultant  is  therefore  zero. 

Whenever  forces  are  in  equilibrium  we  may  set 

R-o, 

and  as  R2  =  Rx2  +  Ry2,  both  Rx  and  Ry  must  be  o.  (Why?) 
Therefore  Fx'  +  Fx"  +  Fxm  + .  .  .  =  o, 

and  Fv'+Fy"+Fy'"+...=o; 

whence  follows  the  theorem: 


FORCES   ACTING    AT   A    SINGLE    POINT  27 

//  any  number  of  forces  acting  on  a  body  keep  it  in 
equilibrium,  the  respective  sums  of  the  components  oj  the 
jorces  along  any  two  straight  lines  at  right  angles  to  each 
other  are  equal  to  zero. 

In  the  solution  of  problems  based  upon  this  theorem 
\ve  may  proceed  as  follows: 

(a)  Draw  the  sketch  illustrating  the  problem. 

(b)  Find  a  point  at  which  the  forces  act  in  equilibrium. 

(c)  In  a  separate  sketch  show  this  point  with  all  the 
forces    acting    upon    it    and    draw   "any   two    straight 
lines   at   right  angles  to  each  other."      These  lines  are 
usually  drawn  so  as  to  coincide  with  as  many  forces  as 
possible. 

(d)  Write  the  equation  expressing  the  fact  that  the 
respective  sums  of  the  components  of  the  forces  along 
these  lines  or  axes  are  equal  to  zero. 

(e)  Solve  the  equations  for  the   unknown   quantities 
they  may  contain. 

(/)  Interpret  the  results  so  obtained. 

Example. — A  rod  AB,  whose  weight  may  be  neglected, 
is  hinged  at  A  and  supports  a  weight  W  at  B.  It  is  held 
up  by  a  wire  BM  fastened  to  a  fixed  point  M  vertically 
above  A.  If  AB  is  horizontal 
and  the  angle  ABM  =  30°,  find 
the  tension,  T,  in  the  wire  and 
the  compression,  C,  in  the  rod. 

Solution.  —  (a)    Fig.    20   illus- 
trates the  problem. 

(b)  The    wire    and    the    rod 

RG.  20 
both     act    upon    the    point    B, 

and  by  the  nature  of  the  problem  this  point  is  in  equi- 
librium, 


28 


ANALYTICAL    STATICS 


(c)  In  Fig.  21  the  forces  acting  at  the  point  B  are  shown. 
BX  and  BY  are  the  lines  along  which  the  components 
will  be  taken. 


FIG.  21 


(d)  The  components  of  the  forces  in  the  X  and   Y 
directions  are: 


Forces 

X  Components 

Y  Components 

C 

C 

0 

W 

0 

-W 

T 

-  T  cos  30° 

T  sin  30° 

Therefore  C  +  o  -  T  cos  30°  =  o  and  o  -  W  +  T  sin  30°  =  o. 


(e)  C- 


or 


-W+T—  =o. 

2 


T=+2W,    and    C  = 


(/)  In  Fig.  21  the  arrow  T  represents  the  action  of  the 
wire  upon  the  point  B.  The  reaction  upon  the  wire 
at  B  is  necessarily  an  equal  but  opposite  one  and  may 


FORCES   ACTING    AT   A    SINGLE   POINT  2  9 

be  represented  as  in  Fig.  22.     As   the  wire  is  in  equi- 

librium,   an     equal    force    must 

act   upon   the    wire   at   M,   this       \.M 

force     being     supplied     by    the 

wall.       These     equal    and    op- 

posite    forces     (T  =  zW)    at    M 

and     By     Fig.     22,     produce     a 

tension    of    T  =  2W    Ib.    in    the 


FIG.  22 
wire. 

Explain  the  'effect  of  the  forces  acting  upon  the  rod  AB. 

EXERCISE  36.  A  man  weighing  160  Ib.  rests  in  a  hammock 
suspended  by  ropes  which  are  inclined  at  30°  and  45°  to  two 
vertical  posts.  Find  the  pull  in  each  rope. 

EXERCISE  37.  A  man  weighing  W  Ib.  is  seated  in  a  loop 
at  the  end  of  a  rope  /  feet  long,  the  other  end  being  fastened 
to  a  point  above.  What  horizontal  force  will  pull  him  m  feet 
from  the  vertical,  and  what  will  be  the  pull  on  the  rope?  If 
the  rope  is  just  strong  enough  to  support  the  man  when  the 
rope  is  vertical,  will  it  support  the  man  when  displaced  from 
the  vertical? 

EXERCISE  38.  A  thread  whose  length  is  2/  is  fastened  at 
two  points,  A  and  B,  in  the  same  horizontal,  and  distant  / 
from  each  other.  The  thread  carries  a  smooth  ring  of  weight 
W.  Find  the  tension  in  the  thread. 

EXERCISE  39.  What  weight  can  be  sustained  on  a  smooth 
inclined  plane,  the  ratio  of  whose  height  to  base  is  5  :  12,  by 
a  horizontal  force  of  10  pounds  and  a  force  of  50  pounds 
parallel  to  the  plane.  What  is  the  pressure  on  the  plane? 

EXERCISE  40.  Five  men  pull  upon  five  ropes  knotted 
together  towards  the  south,  northeast,  east,  northwest, 
and  30°  south  of  west  respectively.  If  the  first  three  exert 
forces  of  70,  30,  and  40  pounds  respectively  and  the  knot 
does  not  move,  find  the  forces  exerted  by  the  remaining  two 
men. 


tends  to  take  Place 


30  ANALYTICAL    STATICS 

SECTION  IV 

STATICAL    FRICTION 

Thus  far  the  surfaces  of  bodies  in  contact  have  been 
assumed  perfectly  smooth,  that  is,  they  offered  no  re- 
in  which  Motion         >    sistance  to  the  motion  of  * 
the  bodies  parallel  to  their 
surfaces.      In    reality   no  A 
- — >•      body  can  •  be  made    per- 
fectly smooth,  and  thus  if 
a  body   weighing   W   Ib. 
is   to  be  moved  along  a  ' 

horizontal  plane,  a  certain  force  P  is  necessary  to  start  ' 
the  body,  Fig.  23. 

This  force  P  overcomes  an  equal  but  opposite  force  F, 
arising  from  the  irregularities  in  the  surfaces  of  contact 
which    fit    more    or    less 
closely    into    one    another. 
This  is  shown  in  Fig.  24, 
which    represents    a    very 
highly   magnified    view    of 

the  contact  between  th'e  weight  and  plane.  This  force,, 
F,  is  called  Friction.  From  an  inspection  of  Fig.  24 
it  is  evident  that  the  irregularities  will  always  grip  in 
such  a  way  as  to  resist  any  motion  of  the  weight  W. 
So  that:  The  direction  in  which  friction  acts  is  always 
opposite  to  the  direction  in  which  motion  would  take  place 
if  there  were  no  friction. 

The  amount  of  friction  up  to  a  certain  limit  is  always 
just  sufficient  to  prevent  motion.  But  only  a  limiting 
amount  of  friction  can  be  called  into  play.  We  may 


FORCES    ACTING    AT   A    SINGLE    POINT  3! 

suppose  that  this  limiting  amount  of  friction  is  reached 
when  either  the  irregularities  give  way  and  break,  or  when 
the  body  lifts  sufficiently  to  allow  the  irregularities  to 
clear  one  another. 

Thus,  if  a  body  rests  upon  a  horizontal  table,  the  pres- 
sure of  the  table  balances  the  weight ;  and  as  these  forces 
are  both  vertical,  there  is  no  tendency  to  move  in  the  hori- 
zontal direction  and  no  friction  is  called  into  play.  Apply 
a  small  force  parallel  to  the  surface;  the  body  does  not 
move;  sufficient  friction  is  exerted  to  just  balance  the 
applied  force;  increase  the  applied  force  and  still  the 
friction  increases  so  as  to  hold  the  force  in  equilibrium 
until  the  applied  force  reaches  a  certain  magnitude, 
which  the  friction  cannot  reach,  and  the  body  moves. 
(Try  this  experiment  with  a  book.) 

Experiment  shows  that  the  amount  o)  this  limiting 
friction  varies  as  the  normal  pressure  between  surfaces  in 
contact,  or  is  directly  proportional  to  the  force  with  which 
they  are  pressed  together.  Therefore,  if 

F  =  limiting  friction 
and  N  =  normal  pressure, 

.Foe  TV, 
and  .*.  F=/*N,* 

where  ^  is  a  constant  depending  upon  the  material  of  the 
surfaces  in  contact  and  the  state  of  their  polish,  but  not 
on  their  area  or  shape. 

This  constant  /*,  the  Coefficient  of  Friction,  is  deter- 

*  The  sign  ex  is  read  "varies  as,"  and  fi  is  called  a  proportionality 
factor. 


ANALYTICAL    STATICS 


mined  by  experiment  and  for  some  substances  is  approxi- 
mately as  follows: 

Wood  on  wood  or  metal,  surface  dry 0.4  to  0.6 

"       ' '      "      "       '  lubricated  .  .  o .  i  to  o .  2 

Metal  on  metal,  surface  dry 0.2 

"       "      "  lubricated 0.075 

Steel  on  ice o  .02 

EXERCISE  41.  Find  the  greatest  horizontal  force  which  can 
be  applied  to  a  sled  shod  with  steel  and  resting  on  a  horizontal 
sheet  of  ice  without  causing  motion,  if  the  weight  of  the  sled 
is  50  Ib.  and  the  load  is  200  Ib. 

EXERCISE  42.  An  iron  mass  of  1000  Ib.  rests  upon  a  hori- 
zontal wooden  floor.  What  will  be  the  least  horizontal  force 
necessary  to  move  the  same  if  the  coefficient  of  friction  is 
0.5?  Between  what  limits  may  the  applied  force  vary  with- 
out producing  motion? 

Consider  a  weight  W  placed  upon  a  rough  inclined 
plane  (Fig.  25).  The  tendency  to  move  is  in  the  down- 


FIG.  25 


FIG.  26 


ward  direction  and  we  thus  have  the  friction  acting  up- 
ward and  parallel  to  the  plane. 

This  force  with  the  other  forces  acting  upon  W  are. 
shown  in  Fig.  26,  and  as  the  weight  is  assumed  at  rest 
we  have : 


FORCES    ACTING    AT    A    SINGLE    POINT  33 

Forces  X  Components  Y  Components 

W  -Ws'md  -WcosO 

/  /  o 

no  n 


where  I  (sigma,  the  Greek  S)  denotes  summation. 
Thus  IX  is  read,  the  sum  of  the  X  components.  There- 

fore n  =  W  cos  6,     f  =  W  sin  0. 

Thus  the  friction  j  =  W  sin  0,  where  0  is  the  inclination 
of  the  plane. 

Assume  0  to  vary  from  o  to  —  ,  then  sin  6  varies  from  o 

to  i  and  the  friction,  to  preserve  equilibrium,  would  have 
to  vary  from  o  to  W. 

It  is  evident  that  /  cannot  possibly  equal  W  or  even 
approach  this  value,  and  therefore  equilibrium  cannot 
be  preserved  throughout  the  whole 
change  of  6.  As  6  increases 
from  o,  some  limiting  angle  must 
be  reached  beyond  which  the 
plane  cannot  be  inclined  with- 
out causing  the  body  to  slide. 

If    we    call    this    limiting    angle 

FIG.  27 
a,  then   in    Fig.    27    the    weight 

will  be  on  the  point  of  sliding  and  is  retained  in 
equilibrium  by  the  limiting  friction  F,  and  the  values 
of  n  and  /  above  deduced  become 

N  =  Wcosa, 


.F      W  sin  a 
from  which  {J-=~^  =  ^Tr  —    —  =  tan  a  can  be  obtained 

r    N     [f  cos  a 


34  ANALYTICAL    STATICS 

The  limiting  angle,  a,  is  known  as  the  Angle  of  Friction 
or  the  Angle  oj  Repose;    therefore:    The  tangent  oj  the 
angle  oj  friction  is  equal  to  the  coefficient  oj  friction. 
As  has  already  been  pointed  out  (page  15),  a  surface 
always  exerts  a  normal  pressure 
or  reaction  upon  a  body  in  con- 
tact   with   it.      If  the   plane   is 
rough  we  will  have,  under  cer- 
tain conditions,  the    friction  as 

an  additional  reaction  (Fig.  28). 

ur  ^te  The  resultant  of  these  forces  is 

called  the  Total  Reaction  of  the 

surface.     If  <j>  be  the  angle  between  the  normal  to  the 
surface  and  the  total  reaction,  we  have 


F 

and  as  j^  =  JJL  =  tan  a, 

tan  (j)  =  tsma} 
.'.  <f>=a. 
Therefore: 

The  greatest  angle  that  the  total  reaction  of  a  rough 
surface  can  make  with  the  normal  is  equal  to  the  angle  oj 
friction. 

Example. — A  heavy  body  rests  on  a  rough  plane  in- 
clined at  an  angle  30°  to  the  horizontal,  the  coefficient 

2 

of  friction  being  —  ^    A  horizontal  force  is  applied  to 
V3 

the  body,  and  is  gradually  increased  until  the  body  begins 
to  move  up  the  plane;  find  the  magnitude  of  the  hori- 
zontal force. 


FORCES    ACTING    AT    A   SINGLE    POINT 


35 


Solution. — As  /£  =  —=,  the  tangent  of  the  limiting  angle 
(a)  to  which  the  plane  may  be  inclined  without  causing 

2 

the  weight  to  slide  is  — ,— ,  or 
V3 


tan  a  =  — -^= 1.15  + ; 


As  the  plane  is  only  inclined  at  30°,  the  body  will  remain 
at  rest  upon  the  plane  with  only  part  of  the  total  amount 
of  friction  (acting  upward)  brought  into  play  (Fig.  29). 


FIG.  29 


FIG.  30 


If  the  force  p,  Fig.  30,  be  now  applied,  this  force  will 
tend  to  cause  motion  up  the  plane,  thus  relieving  /,  and 
as  p  increases  it  causes  /  to  act  down  the  plane,  finally 
overcoming  /,  thus  producing  motion  up  the  plane. 

The  value  of  p  which  we  are  to 
consider  is  the  limiting  one  just  suffi- 
cient to  balance  the  limiting  value 
of  /  acting  downward.  We  will  call 
these  values  of  p  and  /,  P  and  F. 

Fig.  31  shows  this  condition  of  equilibrium. 


36  ANALYTICAL   STATICS 

Fig.  32  shows  us  all  the  forces  acting  upon  the  body. 
We  have: 

Forces  X  Components        Y  Components 

P  P                           o 

N  —N  sin  30°          N  cos  30° 

F  —F  cos  30°          —  F  sin  30° 

W  o    '                     -W 


w 


FIG.  32 
and  the  conditions  of  equilibrium  are 

2X=P-N  sin  30°-^  cos  3o°  =  o, 
=  N  cos  30°-^  sin  3o°-TF=o, 


or 


W  =  ^N--F. 

2  2 


(0 


These  equations  contain  three  unknown  quantities,  TV, 
P,  and  jP.  So  that  we  must  find  another  equation  before 
we  can  effect  a  solution.  This  third  equation  is  obtained 
through  the  law  of  friction.  We  know  the  coefficient  of 
friction,  and  as  F  is  the  limiting  value  oj  the  friction  and 
AT"  the  normal  pressure  between  the  surfaces, 


we  have 


=  —AT  =  -  —  3  AT. 


V3 


(3) 


FORCES    ACTING    AT    A   SINGLE    POINT  37 

We  can  now  find  P  in  terms  of  W  from  equations  (i), 
(2),  and  (3).     Substituting  F  from  (3)  in  (i)  and  (2), 

P=ljv+JV=:^Ar,  (4) 

2  2 

\f   1  V   1  V3 

Hr__^_  _o.V==-^2V.      .     .     .     (5) 
Substitute  JV  from  (4)  in  (5), 


EXERCISE  43.  A  weight  W  rests  in  equilibrium  on  a  rough 
inclined  plane,  being  just  on  the  point  of  slipping  down.  On 
applying  a  force  W  parallel  to  the  plane,  the  weight  is  just 
on  the  point  of  moving  up.  Find  the  angle  of  the  plane  and 
the  coefficient  of  friction. 

EXERCISE  44.  What  is  the  coefficient  of  friction  when  a 
body  weighing  50  Ib.  just  rests  on  a  plane  inclined  at  30°  to 
the  horizontal  ?  If  the  plane  were  horizontal,  what  horizontal 
force  would  be  required  to  move  the  body? 

EXERCISE  45.  What  horizontal  force  will  be  required  to 
support  a  weight  of  300  Ib.  upon  a  smooth  inclined  plane 
whose  height  is  3/5  of  its  length  ? 

EXERCISE  46.  A  block  of  iron  weighing  10  Ib.  rests  on  a 
level  plate.  A  string  attached  to  the  block  passes  over  a 
pulley  so  placed  above  the  plate  that  the  string  makes  an 
angle  of  45°  with  the  vertical.  After  passing  over  this  pulley 
the  string  supports  a  weight.  Find  the  least  value  of  this 
weight  which  will  make  the  block  slip,  the  coefficient  of  fric- 
tion being  0.2. 

EXERCISE  47.  Explain  with  diagrams  two  methods  for 
experimentally  determining  the  coefficient  of  friction. 


38  ANALYTICAL   STATICS 

EXERCISE  48.  A  weight  of  60  pounds  rests  on  a  rough  level 
floor.  Find  the  least  horizontal  force  that  will  move  it 
(^  =  0.5).  Find  the  total  reaction  of  the  floor.  What  is  its 
direction  ? 

EXERCISE  49.  Find  the  least  angle  of  inclination  of  a 
wooden  incline  that  stone  blocks  may  slide  down  under  the 


action  of  gravity. 


Hr) 


EXERCISE  50.  On  a  hill  sloping  i  in  50  a  loaded  sled 
weighing  one  ton  is  kept  from  sliding  down.  Show  that  the 
pull  of  the  horses  may  vary  from  360  to  440  pounds,  the 
coefficient  of  friction  between  sled  and  snow  being  0.2. 

SECTION  V 
MOMENTS 

We  will  now  consider  another  method  of  obtaining  the 
relations  existing  between  forces  acting  on  a  particle. 

In  Fig.  33  consider  the  force  F  acting  on  a  particle  at  A 
and  conceive  a  fixed  point  O  to  be  rigidly  connected  to  A. 
The  force  F  will  then  tend  to  move  the 
particle  A  about  O  as  centre.     The  effect 
of  the  force  in  producing  rotation  about 
O  depends  not  only  upon  the  magnitude 
of  the  force  F,  but  also  upon  the  dis- 
tance of    the  line  of    action  of  F  from 
O.     This  perpendicular  distance,  d,  is  called  the  arm  oj 
the  force.     We  may  then  state  as  a  definition  that  the 

Moment  oj  a  jorce  with  rejerence   to   a  point  is  the 
product  oj  the  jorce  and  its  arm, 

wherein  the  word  moment  is  used  in  its  old-fashioned 
sense  of  importance  or  influence;   so  that  the  moment  of 


FORCES    ACTING  AT    A    SINGLE    POINT 


39 


da 


a  force  with  reference  to  a  point  means  its  influence  in 
producing  rotation  about  this  point. 

The  point  O,  from  which  the  perpendicular  is  drawn,  is 
called  the  origin  o)  moments  and  may  be  chosen  arbi- 
trarily. 

The  algebraic  sign  of  a  moment  is  considered  positive 
if  it  tends  to  turn  the  system  in  a  direction  opposite  to 

that    of    the    hands   of    a  FI 

watch,  and  negative  if  in 
the  other  direction.  This 
assumption  is  purely  arbi- 
trary, but  it  will  be  noticed 
that  it  conforms  with  the 
positive  and  negative  di- 
rections assumed  in  the 
measurement  of  angles  in 
Trigonometry.  Thus  in  Fig. 
34  the  moments  of  the 
forces  with  reference  to  the  origin  of  moments  O  are 
— F\d\'y  ~{~F2d2,  -\-F^d^]  F 4(0)  —05  and  — F^d^. 

As  the  moment  of  a  iorce  =  Fd,  the  unit  moment  is 
the  moment  due  to  a  force  of  i  pound  whose  arm  is  i  foot. 
No  name  has  been  assigned  to  this  unit. 

EXERCISE  51.  A  force  of  5  pounds  acts  along  one  side  of  an 
equilateral  triangle  whose  side  is  2  feet  long.  Find  the  mo- 
ment about  the  vertex  of  the  opposite  angle. 

EXERCISE  52.  A  force  of  P  pounds  acts  along  the  diagonal 
of  a  square  whose  side  is  2n  feet.  Find  the  moments  of  P 
about  each  of  the  four  vertices. 

EXERCISE  53.  If  P  is  the  thrust  along  the  connecting-rod 
of  an  engine,  r  the  crank-radius,  and  the  connecting-rod  is 
inclined  to  the  crank  at  150°,  show  that  the  moment  of  the 


F. 
FIG.  34 


4o 


ANALYTICAL    STATICS 


FIG.  35 


thrust  about  the  crank-axis  is  one-half  the  greatest  moment 
possible. 

EXERCISE  54.  At  what  height  from  the  foot  of  a  tree  must 
one  end  of  a  rope,  whose  length  is  /  feet,  be  fastened  so  that 
B      a  given  force  acting   at  the  other  end  may 
have  the   greatest   tendency  to  overturn  it, 
assuming  the  force  applied  at  the  ground. 
EXERCISE    55.    The    post  AC,   Fig.   35, 
of   a   jib-crane   is    10    feet    long;     the    jib 
CB  is  inclined  at  30°,  and  the  tie  AB  at 
60°,  to   the   vertical.      If   the  weight   lifted 
is  10  tons,  find  the  moment  about  C  tend- 
ing to  upset  the  crane. 

The  moment  of  a  force  may  be  geometrically  repre- 
sented    by     twice     the     area    of    a  / 
triangle    whose     base    is    the    force 
and   whose  altitude  is  the   arm    of 
the  force.     Thus  in  Fig.    36,  2  (area 
of     AOAB)  =Fd  =  moment     of     F 
about  O. 

This  geometrical  representation  will  be  used  to  prove 
Varignon's  Theorem  o)  Moments: 

The  sum  of  the  moments  of  two  forces,  FI  and  F2, 

about  any  point  O  in 
their  plane  is  equal  to  the 
moment  of  their  result- 
ant, R,  about  the  same 
point. 

In   Fig.   37    (moment  of 
Fl    about    O)  =  2AOAB, 
(moment    of   F2  about  O) 
,  (moment  of  R 


FIG.  36 


FIG.  37 

about  O)=2AO4C.     We  must  prove  that 


FORCES    ACTING    AT    A    SINGLE    POINT  41 

(moment  of  FI)  +  (moment  of  F2)  =  (moment  of  R), 
or 

Draw  BE  and  DF  \\  OA.     Then 

AOAB-0=AOAE    and     AOAD=C>AOAF.     (Why?) 

Prove     A  E  =  CF,  by  means  of  A  A  BE  and  ADCF.  Then 

AOAEOAOFC.     (Why?) 

From  this  the  remainder  of  the  proof  may  be  easily 
deduced. 

Theorem:  If  any  number  0}  forces  acting  upon  a  par- 
ticle   are    in    equilibrium,    the 
algebraic  sum  o]  their  moments 
about  any  point  will  be  zero. 

To     prove     this     proposi- 
tion   consider  the   forces   FI, 
F2,  .  .  .  ,   Fig.   38,  to  be  in   x*,/        \ 
equilibrium,  and  O   any   ori-  Y-^d8     \ 

gin  of    moments.      We  must 

FIG.  38 
now  prove 

F1dl+F2d2  +  .  .  .=o. 

Join  O  and  A  and  find  the  component  forces  _L  to  OA  ; 
then 

Fi  sin  #!  +F2  sin  62  +  .  .  .  =o.     (Why?) 

But  sin/9!=,     sin/92  =        ,     etc. 


Therefore  FI   c- 


and  Fidi+F2d2  +  .  .  .=o; 

or  J  moment  =  IM  =  o. 


ANALYTICAL    STATICS 


Example. — A  brace  AB  rests  against  a  smooth  vertical 
wall  and  upon  a  rough  horizontal  plane,  and  supports 
a  weight  W  at  its  upper  end.  Find  the  compression  in 
the  brace  if  the  angle  CAB  is  0. 

Solution. — The  forces  acting  at  A  are  W,  AT,  and  C, 

Fig.  39- 

As  these  forces  are  in  equilibrium  we  may  select  any 

point  as  our  origin  of  moments  and  equate  the  sum  of  the 

moments  to  zero.  But  as  we 
seek  a  relation  between  C  and 
W,  we  should  attempt  to  ex- 
clude AT  from  our  equation  of 
moments.  This  can  only  be 
done  by  choosing  the  origin 
of  moments  upon  the  line  of 
action  of  N,  thus  reducing  its 
arm  to  zero.  Besides,  the 

origin   of    moments   should  be  chosen  conveniently  for 

calculation.      Vertically  above  B  at  O  is  a  good  position. 

Thus, 


2M=-W(OA)+C(OAcos6)=o;     .'.  C  =  Wsec6. 

EXERCISE  56.  Find  the  normal  reaction  of  the  wall  in  the 
preceding  example. 

EXERCISE  57.  A  weight  W  is  attached  to  a  string  which  is 
secured  at  A  to  a  vertical  wall  and  pushed  from  the  vertical 
by  a  strut  BC  perpendicular  to  the  wall;  find  the  pressure 
on  BC  when  the  angle  CAB  is  0. 

EXERCISE  58.  A  rod  whose  length  is  BC  =  l  is  secured  at  a 
point  B  in  a  horizontal  plane,  and  the  end  C  held  up  by  a 
cord  AC  so  that  /.ABC  is  0  and  the  distance  AB  =  a\  re- 
quired the  compression  in  BC  due  to  a  weight  W  applied  at  C, 


CHAPTER  II 

FORCES  ACTING  ON  A  RIGID  BODY 
SECTION  VI 

RESULTANT   OF  TWO   FORCES.      COUPLES 

To  the  present  our  work  has  been  confined  to  the 
investigation  of  forces  applied  to  a  single  point  or  particle. 

We  shah1  now  consider  the  action  of  forces  applied  at 
different  points  of  a  rigid  body. 

A  body  is  said  to  be  rigid  when  the  particles  of  which 
it  is  composed  retain  their  relative  positions  no  matter 
what  external  forces  may  be  applied  to  the  body.  Prac- 
tically no  such  thing  as  a  rigid  body  is  found  in  nature, 
but  if  the  body  considered  " gives"  under  the  action 
of  the  applied  forces,  the  methods  now  to  be  described 
may  still  be  employed,  provided  the  positions  of  the 
points  of  application  considered 
are  assumed  after  all  changes 
in  the  body  have  ceased. 

If    any    force    F    (Fig.    40) 
be    applied    to    a    body  at  A, 

the    effect   of    this   force    will 

,   .P  .          .   ,  FIG.  40 

remain  unchanged  if  its  point 

of  application  be  moved  to  any  other  point  in  the  line  of 
action  of  the  jorce,  such  as  A'.  This  principle  is  known 
as  the  transmissibility  oj  a  jorce< 

43 


44 


ANALYTICAL    STATICS 


FIG.  41 


Let  the  question  be  proposed  to  find  the  resultant  of 
\  !  two  non-parallel  forces  FI  and 

F2,  Fig.  41,  applied  to  a  body, 
B,  at  the  points  AI  and  A2. 

Then  by  the  above  principle 
the  force  FI  may  have  its 
point  of  application  trans- 
ferred to  any  point  in  its  line 
of  action;  the  same  holds  for 
the  force  F2.  Let  us  select 
the  point  P  at  the  intersec- 
tion of  their  lines  of  action  as 
the  new  point  of  applica- 
tion. The  transference  of  the  forces  FI  and  F2  to  the 

new  point  P  reduces   the  problem  to  the  simple  case 

of     the      parallelogram      of 

forces,  and  the    resultant    R 

may  now  be  applied  to  any 

point   in   its    line    of  action 

PAS. 

Consider  now  the  compu- 
tation of  the  resultant  oj  two 

parallel  jorces  FI  and  F2,  Fig. 

42.      It   is  evident  that   the 

method  of  transmissibility  of 

forces  will  in  this  case  lead 

to   no   result.      (Why?)      So 

a  special    artifice    must    be 

used. 

Two  equal  and  oppositely 

directed   forces   F  having   a 

common  line  of  action  AiA2  are  introduced.     As  these 


FIG.  42 


FORCES    ACTING    ON   A    RIGID    BODY  45 

forces  neutralize  each  other  their  introduction  will  not 
affect  the  original  problem.  Combine  these  forces  with 
FI  and  F2  and  obtain  the  forces  RI  and  ^2.  Now,  instead 
of  considering  FI  and  F2,  find  the  resultant  of  RI  and 
R2,  which  we  will  denote  by  R,  whose  point  of  application 
is  anywhere  in  the  line  PC,  at  C  if  we  so  choose. 

By  resolving  R\  and  R2  at  P  into  components  along 
PC  and  parallel  to  A^A2  the  magnitude  oj  R  will  be  jound 
to  be  Fi+F2,  and  its  direction  will  be  parallel  to  FI  and 
F2.  (Prove  this.)  To  completely  determine  the  resultant 
it  is  sufficient  to  locate  any  convenient  point,  say  C  on 
AiA2,  on  its  line  of  action.  From  the  similar  triangles 
A2MN  and  PCA2  we  find  that 

F2     PC  Fl      PC 

-F-CAJ    similarly    j  =  —  ; 

/.      -2  =         ,    or    F1(CAl)=F2(CA2). 


As  the  angle  between  the  forces  FI,  F2  and  the  line 
AiA2  does  not  enter  into  this  discussion,  it  should  be 
noticed  that  the  resultant  R  always  passes  through  C 
irrespective  of  the  direction  of  the  parallel  forces. 

This  point  C  is  therefore  called  the  Center  of  the  Parallel 
Forces. 

EXERCISE  59.  Show  how  to  find  the  resultant  of  two  un- 
equal parallel  forces  acting  in  opposite  directions  but  not  in 
the  same  straight  line. 

Through  Ex.  59  we  arrive  at  the  result  shown  in  Fig. 
43.  The  resultant  of  the  two  unequal  parallel  forces, 
FI  and  F2j  is  parallel  to  them,  but  divides  the  line  AiAz 


46  ANALYTICAL    STATICS 

externally  at  C.     The  resultant  has  the  same  direction 
c  as  the  greater  of   the.   two   forces,  F2, 
and  equals  F2  —  Fi.      Also  F2 (CA 2)  = 


EXERCISE  60.    Three  forces  are  repre- 
sented by  the  lines  AD,  BC,  and  DB  in  a 
parallelogram  A  BCD.     Show  that  ^4C  is 
FlG-  43  their  resultant. 

EXERCISE  61.  Two  forces  acting  upon  a  body  are  located 
with  reference  to  a  set  of  rectangular  axes  as  follows:  F\, 
point  of  application  (  —  4,  —4),  with  arrow  representing  force 
extending  to  (2,  6);  F2,  point  of  application  (i,  7),  arrow  ex- 
tending to  (14,  6).  Find  the  resultant. 

EXERCISE  62.  Two  parallel  forces  of  3  and  5  pounds  act  in 
the  same  direction  at  points  2  feet  apart.  Find  their  resultant 
in  magnitude  and  position. 

EXERCISE  63.  Two  parallel  forces  of  3  and  5  pounds  act 
in  opposite  directions  at  points  2  feet  apart.  Find  their  re- 
sultant in  magnitude  and  position. 

EXERCISE  64.  "We  have  a  set  of  hay-scales  and  sometimes 
we  have  to  weigh  wagons  that  arc  too  long  to  go  on  them. 
Can  we  get  the  correct  weight  by  weighing  one  end  at  a  time 
and  then  adding  the  two  weights  ? " 

Consider  the  case  oj  two  equal  parallel  jorces  acting  in 
opposite  directions  (Fig.  44).  If  we  here  apply  the 
artifice  used  when  the  forces  are  unequal,  we  find  that 
the  lines  of  action  of  R±  and  R\  are  still  parallel  and 
the  method  fails. 

But  from,  the  results  obtained  in  Ex.  59  we  have 
R  =  F1-F1=o  and  F1(CA1)=Fl(CA2)-,  .'.  CA1=CA2. 

But  as  C  must  divide  A iA2  externally,  CAi  can  only 
equal  CA2,  as  CA2  =  °°.  (The  sign  ±  is  read  " ap- 
proaches," /,  CA%  approaches  infinity.)  In  other  words, 


FORCES    ACTING    ON   A    RIGID    BODY 


47 


FIG.  44 


the  two  jorces  cannot  be  reduced  to  a  single  force  in  a 

definite  position. 

This  combination  o]  two  equal  parallel  jorces  acting  in 

opposite  directions,  but  not 

in  the  same  straight  line, 

which  cannot  be  replaced 

by  a  single  force,  is  called 

a  couple. 

As  shown  a  couple  can- 
not be  reduced  to  a  single 

force,     and      its      action 

therefore    is    not    that  of 

a  force.     It  thus  becomes 

imperative  to  study  more 

fully  the  properties  of  couples. 

The  tendency  of  a  couple  is  to  cause  rotation.     This 

is  illustrated  in  the  operation  of  a  screw  copying-press, 

or  in  the  winding  of  a  watch  or  clock.     This  tendency 

to  produce  rotation  is  measured,  as  explained  on  page  38, 

by  the  moments  of  the  forces. 

Select  any  point  O,  Fig.  45,  in  the  plane  of  the  couple 

and  draw  trie  line  Oab  per- 
pendicular to  the  lines  of 
action  of  the  forces  F. 
The  sum  of  the  moments 
ste  of  the  forces  about  O  is 
°  -F(aO)+F(bO)=F(bO- 
aO)=F(ab).  The  distance 
ab  is  called  the  arm  oj  the 
couple,  and  we  have  shown 
that  the  moment  oj  the 


FIG.  45 


couple  [F(ab)]  about  any  point  in  its  plane  is  the   prod- 


ANALYTICAL  STATICS 


uct  oj  one  oj  the  forces  and  the  arm;  the  sign  to  be 
determined,  as  on  page  39,  by  the  direction  in  which  the 
body  acted  on  would  tend  to  turn. 


Theorems  Concerning  Couples 

In  the  proofs  of  the  following  theorems  we  shall  always 
consider  the  forces  of  the  couple  applied  at  the  ends  of 
their  arm.  That  a  couple  can  always  be  reduced  to  this 
form  is  evident  from  Fig.  45.  Here  we  may  move  the 
forces  F  along  their  lines  of  action  until  the  tails  of 
their  arrows  are  respectively  at  a  and  b. 

We  will  first  prove  that  the  action  of  a  couple  remains 
unaltered  if  it  is  moved  anywhere  in  its  plane  in  such  a 
position  that  the  forces  remain  parallel  to  their  original 
directions,  or 

The  translation  0}  a  couple  does  not  alter  its  effect  upon 
the  body. 

In  Fig.  46  consider  the  couple  F(A  iA2)F.  We  wish  to 
show  that  it  is  equivalent  to 
the  couple  F(Alf'A2ff)F)  in 
which  the  F's  are  the  unmarked 
ones. 

To  do  this  first  move  its 
forces  by  the  principle  of 
transmissibility  to  the  position 
A\A2.  Then  anywhere  on 
AifA2  prolonged  take  A\fA%r 
equal  to  Ai'A2=AiA2.  In- 
troduce at  AI"  and  A2"  two 
pairs  of  equal  and  oppositely 


1 
1 

R4=2F 

'         ,   f 

: 

:»    : 

F 
\\ 

. 

1 

F    V 

'  l 

^            A2 

FIG.  46 
directed  forces  F. 


TI.e  body  originally  acted  on  by  the 


FORCES    ACTIXG    ON    A    RIGID    BODY  49 

couple  F(AiA2)F  will  now  be  acted  upon  by  six  forces, 
but  its  state  of  rest  or  motion  will  not  be  altered. 

Now  the  singly  marked  F's  may  be  replaced  by  the 
singly  marked  R  =  2F,  their  resultant.  Similarly  for 
the  doubly  marked  forces.  The  7?'s  balance  each  other 
and  their  action  may  be  neglected.  Thus  all  forces  but 
the  unmarked  ones  at  AI"  and  A2"  are  accounted  for. 
These  evidently  form  the  couple  F(Ai"A2")F,  which  is 
therefore  equivalent  to  the  couple  F(A1A2)F. 

We  will  now  show  that  a  couple  may  be  rotated  about 
any  point  without  altering  its  action. 

In  Fig.  47  consider  the  couple  F(AiA2)F.  On  any 
line  MA2'  lay  off  MA^  = 
MAi  and  A\A2'=A\A2. 
At  AI  and  A 2  introduce 
the  pairs  of  forces  F  J_  to 
AI 'A2 '.  Now  the  singly 
marked  F's  reduce  to  their 
singly  marked  resultant  R. 
Similarly  for  the  doubly 
marked  .F's.  /M 

The  resultants  R  have  a 
common  line  of  action  (which 

bisects  £AiMAi)  and  are  of  equal  magnitude.  (Prove 
this.)  They  thus  neutralize  each  other  and  there  re- 
mains only  the  couple  F(A^'A2')FJ  which  proves  the 
proposition. 

As  a  corollary  to  the  above  theorems  we  can  state  that 

A  couple  can  be  shijted  into  any  position  in  its  plane 
without  altering  its  action. 

Another  important  theorem  concerning  couples  is  the 
following : 


ANALYTICAL  STATICS 


TAi 


FIG.  48 


Any  couple  may  be  replaced  by  another  couple  oj  equal 
moment. 

This  may  be  demonstrated  thus:  In  Fig.  48  consider 
the  couple  F(AiA2)F.  Let  A3  be  any  point  in  AiA2 
prolonged.  Introduce  two  pairs  of  equal  and  opposite 
forces  P  _L  to  A^3  at  A 3  and 
A  2.  Let  us,  however,  make  P 
of  such  magnitude  that  P(A2A3) 
=  F(A1A2).  The  resultant  of 
the  singly  marked  P  and  F  will 
be  Ri=F  +  P  acting  at  A2  (see 
page  44),  and  the  resultant  of 
the  doubly  marked  P  and  F  is 
R2  =  F  +  P  acting  at  A  2.  These 
resultants  neutralize  each  other  and  there  remains 
only  the  couple  P(A2A3)P',  but  as  P(A2AS)  was  made 
equal  to  F(AiA2),  this  new  couple  has  the  same  moment 
as  the  original  couple.  Combining  this  result  with  the 
previous  theorem  we  arrive  at  our  present  theorem. 

We  can  now  state  that  the  resultant  oj  any  number  oj 
couples  is  a  couple  whose  moment  is  the  sum  oj  the  moments 
oj  the  given  couples. 

For  the  given  couples  may  all  be  reduced  to  equivalent 
couples  having  a  given  arm.  They  may  then  be  shifted 
until  the  lines  of  action  of  their  forces  coincide  in  pairs. 
Their  forces  may  then  be  added  and  there  results  a 
couple  whose  moment  is  equal  to  the  sum  of  the  moments 
of  the  given  couples. 

EXERCISE  65.  Prove  the  last  theorem  for  the  case  of  three 
couples  whose  moments  are  Pa,  Qb,  and  Re  and  whose  arms 
are  a,  b,  and  c  respectively. 

EXERCISE  66.  Along  the  sides  AD  and  CB  of  a  rectangle 


FORCES    ACTING    ON   A    RIGID    BODY  51 

A  BCD,  whose  side  AD  is  s  feet  long  and  whose  side  AB  is 
s  yards  long,  forces  of  F  pounds  act,  and  along  AB  and  CD 
forces  of  5-F  pounds  act.  Find  the  moment  of  the  equivalent 
couple.  In  what  position  should  this  equivalent  couple  be 
placed  with  reference  to  the  rectangle  A  BCD? 

It  is  important  to  notice  that  a  single  force  F  acting 
at  C,  Fig.  49,  and  a  couple 
P(a)P  acting  on  a  body  in  the 
same  plane  cannot  be  in  equi- 
librium. For,  the  couple  P(a)P 
may  be  replaced  by  a  couple 
F(b)F,  if  Pa  =  Fb,  and  this  new 
couple  may  be  placed  anywhere 
in  the  plane.  If  placed  as  shown 
in  Fig.  49,  the  forces  at  C  are  FlG-  49 

in  equilibrium,  leaving  the  force  F  at  D  unbalanced. 

EXERCISE  67.  Assume  a  force  of  100  pounds  and  a  couple 
whose  forces  are  50  pounds  and  whose  arm  is  4  feet.  Find 
their  resultant. 

SECTION  VII 
RESULTANT  OF  ANY  NUMBER  OF  FORCES 

We  are  now  in  position  to  find  the  resultant  of  any 
number  of  forces  acting  upon  a  rigid  body. 

Let  the  forces  FI,  F2t  ^3,  ...  act  at  the  points  PI(XI,  yj, 
P2(#2>  ^2),  -Pa  (#3)  ^3)  ...  of  a  body  referred  to  rectangular 
axes.  Consider  the  force  FI  resolved  into  two  components 
Xi  and  FI,  Fig.  50.  At  the  origin  O  apply  two  opposing 
forces  each  equal  and  parallel  to  Xly  and  similarly  for  FI. 
This  will  not  alter  the  given  problem.  Xi  acting  at  PI 
may  now  be  replaced  by  Xi  acting  at  O  plus  a  couple 


ANALYTICAL  STATICS 


whose  moment  is  -Xiji,  and  Yl  acting  at  P  may  be 
replaced  by  FI  acting  at  O  plus  a  couple  whose  moment 
is  YiXi.  Similarly  for  all  the  other  forces  F2,  F3,  .  .  . 


0     X, 


FIG.  50 

The  resultant  of  all  the  component  forces  acting  at  O 
may  now  be  found  as  already  explained  on  pages  24  and 
25.  We  have 


and 


We  have  thus  found  the  magnitude  and  direction  of 
the  resultant,  but  it  is  evident  that  the  line  of  action  of 
the  resultant  need  not  pass  through  the  origin. 

So  far  we  have  neglected  the  couples  introduced  above. 
By  adding  their  moments  we  may  obtain  the  moment  of 
the  resultant  couple  : 


and     tana  = 


=  Z(Yx-Xy). 

We  shall  assume  this  to  be  the  moment  of  a  couple 
whose  forces  are  R,  R,  and  whose  arm  is  a.    R  having 


FORCES    ACTING    ON   A    RIGID    BODY 


53 


been  previously  determined,  the  equation  M  =  Ra  = 
I(Yx-Xy)  determines  a.  These  results  are  illustrated 
in  Fig.  51.  R  acting  at  O  shows  the  magnitude  and  direc- 
tion of  the  forces  acting  at  O,  Fig.  50,  and  RaR  the  couple 
whose  moment  is  M,  placed  in  the  convenient  position 
for  finding  their  resultant  (see  page  51). 


o    R.-Sx, 


FIG.  51 

The  forces  R,  R  acting  at  O  neutralize  each  other,  and 
this  leaves  KL  as  the  final  resultant,  which  may  be  applied 
at  any  point  in  its  line  of  action  KL. 

The  intercept  of  the  line  of  action  of  the  resultant  KL, 
Fig.  51,  upon  the  X-axis  may  readily  be  found  to  be 


(OX)  =- — ,  and  as  sin  a  =  -^-,  we  have 


sm  a 


7-* 

R 


To  condense  this  theory  for  actual  computation  we 
need  simply  fill  out  the  following  table: 


Forces 

X 

y 

X 

Y 

Yx 

Xy 

Yx-Xy 

Fi 

Xl 

y\ 

xl 

Yl 

YlXl 

xiyi 

YlXl-Xiyi 

.f?. 

X2. 

y* 

X2 

V2. 

2 

X2y: 

Y*c:~Xzy* 

54  ANALYTICAL    STATICS 

Then  obtain  the  IX,  IY,  I(Yx-Xy)=Ra.     Finally, 


and  the  intercept  of  the  line  of  action  of  the  resultant 
upon  the  X-axis  is 


which  gives  us  all  the  data  necessary  for  the  location  cf 
the  resultant. 

EXERCISE  68.  Three  forces  FI,  F<2,  F3  have  their  points  of 
application  at  (2,  4),  (4,  —  i),  (—2,  —  2),  and  the  arrows  rep- 
resenting their  ends  at  (6,  7),  (—2,  —6),  and  (—7,  10), 
respectively.  Find  their  resultant. 

EXERCISE  69.  Find  the  resultant  of  the  following  forces, 
given  a  point  on  each  line  of  action,  the  angle  each  line  of 
action  makes  with  the  -Y-axis,  and  their  magnitudes: 

i  st  force:  (3,2);   100°;   50  pounds. 
2d  force:    (—1,3);   200°;   100  pounds. 
3d  force:    (—2,  —4);  30°;  60  pounds. 

EXERCISE  70.  Find  the  resultant  of  the  following  forces: 
PI  =  40  pounds,  ^2  =  30  pounds,  and  PS  =  90  pounds,  whose 
lines  of  action  make  angles  of  60°,  280°,  and  140°  with  the 
X-axis  and  whose  intercepts  on  the  X-axis  are  9  feet,  5  feet, 
and  o  feet,  respectively. 

SECTION  VIII 

CONDITIONS   FOR   EQUILIBRIUM 

The  motion  of  a  rigid  body  may  always  be  considered 
as  either  a  translation,  a  rotation,  or  a  combination  oj 
the  two. 


FORCES    ACTING    ON   A    RIGID    BODY 


55 


FIG.  52 


In  the  motion  of  translation  the  spaces  described  simul- 
taneously by  the  different  parts  of  the  body  are  parallel 
and  equal  to  each  other.  Thus  if,  in  Fig.  52,  AI,  BI, 
Ci  represent  the  positions 
of  the  particles  of  a  body 
at  a  time  /i,  and  A2,  B2, 
C2  represent  their  posi- 
tions at  some  subsequent 
time  t2,  the  body  is  said 
to  possess  a  motion  of 
translation. 

In  the  motion  of  rotation  the  parts  of  the  body  describe 
concentric  arcs  of  circles  about  a  certain  line,  called  the 
axis  oj  rotation.  Thus  in  Fig.  53  the  two  positions  shown 

are  those  of  a  body  pos- 
sessed of  a  motion  of  rota- 
tion, and  a  perpendicular 
to  the  plane  of  the  paper 
passing  through  O  would 
be  the  axis  of  rotation. 

Every  more  complex  mo- 
tion can  be  considered  as 
the  combination  of  a  trans- 
lation and  of  a  rotation. 
Thus,  in  Fig.  54,  if  the 
body  ^l^iCi  moves  to  the 
position  A2B2C2,  we  may  first  conceive  it  to  move  by 
translation  to  A'B'C'  and  then  by  rotation  about  O  as 
an  axis  from  A'B'C'  to  A2B2C2. 

Thus,  only  two  kinds  oj  motion,  Translation  and  Rota- 
tion, need  be  considered. 

Translation  is  always  caused  by  the  resultant  oj  the 


FIG.  53 


ANALYTICAL    STATICS 


forces,  and  Rotation  by  the  resultant  of  the  couples  acting 

on  a  body. 

The  forces  shown  in  Fig.  50,  page  52,  acting  on  the 

body  have  been  reduced,  as  explained  on  pages  52  and 

53,  to  the  force  R  and  a 
couple  whose  moment 
isM  =  Ra.  This  body, 
if  acted  on  only  by  the 
forces  FI,  F2,  F3,  .  .  .  , 
would  possess  a  com- 
pound motion ;  the 
translation  of  which 
\  would  be  due  to  the 
1  force  R,  and  the  rota- 
tion of  which  would  be 
due  to  a  couple  whose 
moment  is  Ra. 

Conceive  now  that 
the  body  is  at  rest, 
possessing  neither  trans- 
lation nor  rotation. 


FIG.  54 


This  would  imply  that  R  (the  cause  of  the  translation) 
is  zero  and  M  =  Ra  (the  cause  of  the  rotation)  is  zero. 

Therefore,  if  any  rigid  body  is  in  equilibrium  under  the 
action  of  forces, 

IX  =  o,     2T =  o,     and     I(Yx-Xy)=o, 

the  X  and  Y  axes  to  be  assumed  at  pleasure. 

In  the  application  of  this  principle  proceed  as  follows : 

(a)  Draw  a  sketch  illustrating  the  problem. 

(b)  Draw  a  diagram  showing  the  body  considered  as 
a  jree  body. 


FORCES    ACTING    ON   A   RIGID    BODY 


57 


(c)  Into  the  last  sketch  introduce  the  coordinate  axes 
and  fill  out  a  table  similar  to  that  shown  on  page  53,  thus 
obtaining  the  IX,  the  ZY,  and  the  2(Yx-Xy). 

The  choice  of  the  position  of  the  axes  must  be  left 
largely  to  the  ingenuity  of  the  student. 

(d)  Solve  the  equations  obtained  by  putting  the  three 
sums  just  found   each  equal  to  zero  for  whatever  un- 
known quantities  are  sought. 

(e)  Interpret  the  results. 

Example. — A  beam  AB  rests  on  smooth  horizontal 
ground  at  A  and  on  a 
smooth  inclined  plane 
at  B\  a  string  is  fast- 
ened at  B  and,  passing 
over  a  smooth  peg  at 
the  top  of  the  plane, 


FIG.  55 


supports  a  weight  P.      If  W,  the  weight  of  the  beam, 
acts  at  the  centre  of  the  beam  and  «  be  the  inclination 

of  the  plane,  find  P  and 
the  reactions  on  the  rod. 
Solution. — (a)  Draw  a 
diagram  illustrating  the 
problem  (Fig.  55). 

(b)  Draw  the  rigid 
body  under  considera- 
tion (beam)  alone  (Fig.  56),  showing  all  the  reactions  and 
other  forces  acting  upon  it. 

(c)  Introduce  the  coordinate  axes  and  complete  the  table: 


FIG.  56 


F 

X 

y 

X 

y 

Y* 

Xy 

Yx-Xy 

% 

-  2/  COS  0 

-  1  cos  0 

-  2/  sin  0 
-I  sine 

o 

0 

Nj 

-W 

—  2Njl  COS0 

Wl  cos  0 

0 

o 

-  zN,l  cos  e 
Wl  cos  d 

P 

0 

o 

0 

o 

—  N2  sin  a 
+  P  cos  a 

A/s  cos  a 
P  sin  a 

0 
0 

0 
0 

0 

o 

58  ANALYTICAL    STATICS 

Then,  as  the  beam  is  in  equilibrium, 
2X = o  =  —  AT  2  sin  a  +  P  cos  a  =  o, 
2Y=o  =  Ni-W  +  N2  cosa  +  P  sina=o, 
and      I(Yx-Xy)=-2N1l  cos  0  +  Wl  cos  6  =  0. 
(d)  Solving  the  equations,  we  obtain 

W  W  W 

NI= — ;     P  =  — sin  a;     N2  =  — cos  a. 

22  2 

EXERCISE  71.  A  beam  20  feet  long  and  weighing  1000 
pounds  rests  at  an  angle  of  60°  with  one  end  against  a  smooth 
vertical  wall  and  the  other  end  on  smooth  horizontal  ground. 
It  is  held  from  slipping  by  a  rope  extending  horizontally  from 
the  foot  of  the  beam  to  the  foot  of  the  wall.  Find  the  tension 
in  the  string  and  the  reaction  at  the  ground  and  wall. 

EXERCISE  72.  Same  as  Exercise  71,  but  assuming  the  wall 
rough,  with  11  =  0.2. 

EXERCISE  73.  Same  as  Exercise  71,  but  assuming  the  ground 
rough,  ^  =  0.3. 

EXERCISE  74.  Same  as  Exercise  71,  but  assuming  the  wall 
rough,  /*  =  o.2,  and  the  ground  rough,  ^  =  0.3. 

EXERCISE  75.  A  beam  20  ft.  long  rests  with  its  upper  end 
against  a  smooth  vertical  wall.  Its  lower  end  rests  on  a 
smooth  horizontal  plane  and  is  prevented  from  slipping  by  a 
rope  1 6  feet  long  fastened  to  it  and  the  base  of  the  wall.  The 
weight  of  the  beam  is  W  and  acts  at  a  point  5  feet  from  its 
upper  end.  Find  the  reactions  of  the  wall  and  the  plane 
and  the  tension  in  the  rope. 

EXERCISE  76.  A  cellar-door  AB,  hinged  at  its  upper  edge, 
A,  rests  at  an  angle  of  45°  with  the  horizontal  when  a  hori- 
zontal force  F  is  applied  to  its  lower  edge,  B.  If  the  weight 
of  the  door,  W,  be  assumed  to  act  at  its  midpoint,  find  the 
force  F  and  the  reaction  at  the  hinge  A . 

EXERCISE  77.  A  uniform  rod,  length  20  and  weight   II', 


FORCES    ACTING    ON   A    RIGID    BODY 


59 


rests  with  one  end  against  the  inner  surface  of  a  smooth  hemi- 
spherical bowl  whose  edge  is  horizontal  and  whose  radius 
is  r.  The  rod  is  also  supported  at  some  point  of  its  length 
by  the  edge  of  the  bowl.  Find  its  position  of  equilibrium. 

Another  method  of  obtaining  the  equation  I (Yx-Xy) 
=o,  used  in  the  solution  of  the  above  exercises,  which  is 
perhaps  less  laborious  than.  V 
that  described  on  page  57,  is 
the  following: 

From  Fig.  57  it  follows, 
by  Varignon's  theorem  of 
moments,  page  40,  that 


Yx-Xy  =  -Fd\ 


y 


FIG.  57 


But  2(Fd)  represents  the  sum  of  the  moments  of  all 
the  forces  about  the  origin  O,  and  as  the  origin  O  may  be 
taken  in  any  position  we  have  as  the  conditions  oj  equilib- 
rium the  three  equations : 

Sum  o)  the  components  of  all  the  forces  along  any  line=o\ 
Sum  of  the  components  of  all  the  forces  along  a  line  JL  to 

the  first  line  =  o', 
Sum  of  the  moments  of  all  the  forces  about  any  point  =  o. 

Example. — A  uniform  cylindrical  shell  of  radius  r 
stands  upon  a  horizontal  plane;  two  smooth  spheres  of 
radii  a  and  b,  such  that  a  +  b>r,  are  placed  within  it. 
Show  that  the  cylinder  will  not  upset  if  the  ratio  of  its 
weight  to  the  weight  of  the  upper  sphere  exceeds  the 
ratio  2r  —  a  —  b:r. 

Solution. — Fig.    58   illustrates   the   problem.     Fig.    59 


6o 


ANALYTICAL    STATICS 


shows  the  cylindrical  shell  as  a  free  body,  W  being  its 
weight.     From  this  figure  we  obtain 


(i) 
(2) 


^(moments  about  O)  =  2rN-rW-zRi=o.  .     (3) 

(We  select  O  as  origin,  as  this  eliminates  R%  from  equa- 

tion^)). 

x-  —  \ 

R 


FIG.  58 


-I- 


FIG.  59 


Consider  now  the  equilibrium  of  the  upper  sphere,  W\ 
being  its  weight,  and  the  corresponding  triangle  of  forces 
(Fig.  60). 

This  triangle  is  similar  to  AABC  (Fig.  58). 


R1     2r-a-b 


2r-a-b 


or 


.   •     (4) 


W 


From  (2),  (3),  and  (4)  we  have  ~^r  = 


EXERCISE  78.  Write  the  equations  for  equilibrium  for  Ex- 
ercises 75,  76,  and  77  by  the  method  just  described. 

An  important  principle  which  in  many  cases  simplifies 
the  solution  of  problems  is  the  following: 

//  three  forces  in  the  same  plane  keep  a  body  in  equilib- 
rium, they  must  be  parallel  or  meet  in  a  point. 


FORCES    ACTING    ON    A    RIGID    BODY 


6l 


From  pages  44  and  45  it  is  evident  that  parallel  forces 
acting  on  a  body  may  be  in  equilibrium.  If  the  three 
forces  are  not  parallel,  two  of  them  at  least  intersect  and 
their  resultant  acting  at  the  point  of  intersection  must 
balance  the  third  force.  Therefore  the  line  of  action 
of  the  third  force  must  pass  through  the  point  of  intersec- 
tion of  the  first  two;  otherwise  a  couple  would  result  and 
the  body  would  not  be  in  equilibrium. 

Example. — A  rod  AB  whose  weight  may  be  neglected 
and  which  is  35  inches  long  carries  a  weight,  W,  at  C, 
20  inches  from  A.  A  thread  49  inches  long  is  tied  to  the 
ends  of  the  rod  and  slung  over  a  smooth  peg  D.  Find 
the  tension  in  the  thread  and  the  inclination  of  the  rod 
to  the  horizontal  when  it  comes  to  rest. 

Solution. — In  Fig.  61,  as  the  thread  ADB  passes  over 
a  smooth  peg  at  D,  the  tensions  in  AD  and  DB  must  be 
equal  to,  say,  T  pounds. 


FIG.  6 1 


FIG.  62 


FIG.  63 


In  Fig.  62  the  lines  of  action  of  the  forces  T,  T,  W,  as 
there  are  only  three,  must  pass  through  Z>,  and  we  may 
apply  the  method  of  the  triangle  of  forces,  Fig.  63. 


As 


,    a=&     and 
T  W 


W 


sin  a     sin{i8o— 


sm(a+/?)* 


62  ANALYTICAL    STATICS 

From  Fig.  61, 

:CB  =  b:a  =  2o:i$;     (Why?) 


:a  =  35:i5;     (Why?) 
49:0  =  35:15; 

49X15 
a  =  —    —  =  21; 

35 

6  =  28. 


AH     28(i\/2) 

then  cc,s  0=  -7—7=  —          -  . 

AC  20  10 

Also  T  =  W%\/~2. 

EXERCISE  79.  A  uniform  beam  weighing  W  pounds  rests 
on  two  smooth  planes  inclined  at  30°  and  60°  to  the  horizontal. 
Find  the  angle  which  the  beam  makes  with  the  horizontal  in 
the  position  of  equilibrium,  and  also  the  pressure  on  the 
planes. 

EXERCISE  80.  A  spherical  shot  weighing  100  pounds  lies 
between  two  smooth  planes  inclined  respectively  at  30°  and 
60°  to  the  horizontal.  Find  the  pressure  on  each  plane. 

EXERCISE  81.  A  straight  rod  4  inches  long  is  placed  in  a 
smooth  hemispherical  cup  and  when  in  equilibrium  one  inch 
projects  over  the  edge.  Find  the  radius  of  the  cup. 

EXERCISE  82.  A  rod  3  feet  long  is  in  equilibrium  resting 
upon  a  smooth  pin  and  with  one  end  against  a  smooth  ver- 
tical wall.  If  the  pin  is  one  foot  from  the  wall,  show  that  the 
inclination  6  to  the  horizontal  is  given  by  3  cos3  6  =  2. 

EXERCISE  83.  A  balanced  window-sash,  whose  height  is  3 
ft.  and  width  4  ft.,  weighs  100  pounds.  If  one  of  the  cords  is 
broken,  what  must  be  the  least  coefficient  of  friction  in  order 
that  the  remaining  cord  may  sustain  the  sash  ? 


FORCES   ACTING    ON   A   RIGID    BODY  63 

EXERCISE  84.  A  hemisphere,  whose  center  of  gravity  is  at  a 
distance  of  f  of  its  radius  from  the  centre  and  is  on  the  radius 
perpendicular  to  its  plane  surface  at  its  centre,  is  sustained 
by  friction  against  a  vertical  wall  and  a  horizontal  plane  of 
equal  roughness.  Find  the  greatest  inclination  of  the  plane 
of  the  base  to  the  horizon. 


SECTION  IX 

PARALLEL  FORCES.   CENTROIDS  OR  CENTRES  OF 
GRAVITY 

In  the  consideration  of  the  conditions  for  the  equilib- 
rium of  forces  acting  on  a  body  we  meet  a  difficulty  not 
involved  in  the  consideration  of  the  forces  acting  on  a 
single  particle.  While  considering  a  particle  the  force  of 
gravity  (the  weight  of  the  particle)  was  assumed  to  act 
at  the  point  occupied  by  the  particle  itself,  but  in  the 
consideration  of  a  body  assumed  to  consist  of  many 
particles,  each  having  its  own  weight,  it  becomes  im- 
perative to  find  the  resultant  jorce  oj  gravity  before  we 
can  apply  the  conditions  of  equilibrium. 

To  this  end  we  will  first  find  the 

Resultant  of  any  Number  of  Parallel  Forces 

In  Fig.  64  conceive  the  forces  FI,  F2,  F^  ...  to 
be  parallel  and  to  have  their  points  of  application  at 
P\(x\y\\  P2(x2y2),  Pz(xzyz\  ....  The  forces  do  not 
necessarily  lie  in  the  plane  xy,  but  may  have  any 
direction  whatsoever  so  long  as  they  remain  parallel. 

Consider  first  the  forces  FI  and  F2\  their  resultant,  by 
the  principle  described  on  page  45,  is  F'=Fi-\-F2,  and 
the  line  of  action  of  t'.e  resultant  divides  P\P2  in  the 


64 


ANALYTICAL   STATICS 


ratio  F2:Fi.     The  coordinates  of  P'  may  now  be  deter- 
mined for 

y  1=—}  = ' — — —  = — — —  (by  similar  triangles), 

f 


from  which  we  obtain 


FIG.  64 


Find  now  the  resultant  F"  of  Ff  and  F3.     Here 


and    —  =. 


/f  _ 


similarly 


FORCES    ACTING    ON   A    RIGID   BODY  65 

The  resultant  of  F"  and  F±  may  now  be  found,  etc. 
The  final  resultant  will  be  R  =  FI+  F2  +  F3  +  .  .  .  ,  and 
the  Centre  of  the  Parallel  Forces  (see  page  45)  will  be 
at  the  point  (x,  y)*  where 


_       FiOCi  +  F2X2  +  ^3^3  +  •  •  •      -      F\y  1+^2^2  +  ^3^3  +  ... 


which  we  will  abbreviate  to 


_    2Fx         .     -    IFy 
*  =  and       = 


Note  particularly  that  the  above  operations  are  wholly 
independent  of  the  direction  of  the  parallel  forces,  and 
the  position  of  the  point  (x,  y)  would  remain  unchanged 
even  if  the  direction  of  the  forces  were  altered. 

EXERCISE  85.  The  legs  of  a  right  triangle  are  3  and  4  feet 
long;  a  force  of  one  pound  acts  at  the  right  angle,  a  negative 
force  of  2  pounds  at  the  greater  acute  angle,  and  a  force  of 
3  pounds  at  the  smaller,  all  forces  being  parallel.  Find  the 
centre  of  the  forces. 

EXERCISE  86.  Four  forces  of  2,  3,  i,  and  —4  pounds  act 
perpendicularly  to  the  plane  xy  at  (i,  —  i),  (o,  4),  (— i,  3), 
and  (i,  2)  respectively.  Find  the  resultant  and  one  point  on 
its  line  of  action. 

It  can  be  shown  that  the  attraction  which  the  earth 
exercises  on  a  particle  is  directed  toward  the  centre  of 
the  earth. 

In  Fig.  65  let  O  represent  the  centre  of  the  earth,  and 
PI  and  ?2  two  particles  near  its  surface;  then  the  arrows 

*x  is  read  "  x  bar." 


66 


ANALYTICAL    STATICS 


FIG.  65 


Wi  and  W%  would  represent  the  forces  of  attraction.     If 
instead  of  the  particles  PI  and  P2  we  consider  a  body 

AB,  then  each  particle  of  the 
body  is  acted  on  by  a  force 
as  represented.  These  forces 
are  certainly  not  parallel, 
but  bodies  such  as  we  ordi- 
narily deal  with  in  mechanics 
are  very  small  in  comparison 
to  the  earth,  under  which 
circumstances  the  lines  of  ac- 
tion of  the  weights  of  the 
particles  are  very  nearly  par- 
allel and  for  practical  purposes  can  be  assumed  perfectly 
parallel. 

Under  these  conditions  the  centre  o]  ike  parallel  forces 
representing  the  weights  0}  the  particles  of  a  body  is  called 
its  centre  of  gravity,  or  centroid. 

As  this  point  is  a  point  in  the  line  of  action  of  the 
resultant  weight,  it  follows  that  a  force  equal  and  oppo- 
site to  this  resultant  acting  through  the  centroid  will 
support  or  balance  the  body  in  any  position. 

To  find  the  position  of  the  centroid  we  may  use  the 
formulae  above  derived  for  parallel  forces,  if  we  remem- 
ber that  the  forces  FI,  F2,  F%,  .  .  .  under  considera- 
tion are  now  the  weights  W\,  W2,  Ws,  ....  Thus 
the  coordinates  of  the  centroid  are 


IWx 


IWy 


and    = 


Example.  —  Find  the  centre  of  gravity  of  three  parti- 
cles each  weighing  W  pounds  placed  upon  the  circum- 


FORCES   ACTING   ON   A   RIGID   BODY  67 

ference  of  a  circle,  radius  r,  so  that  the  first  and  third 
are  90°  from  the  second. 

Solution. — Draw  diagram  illustrating  problem  (Fig.  66). 
Assume  two  rectangular  axes.  Then  the  position  of  the 
C.  of  G.  is  found  as  follows: 


IWx 

X~^W" 


W+W  +  W 


=    IWy 


w+w+w 


the  C.  of  G.  is  reaUy  at  C,  Fig.  66. 


FIG.  66 


FIG.  67 


Example. — Find  the  centroid  of  a  circular  plate  or 
lamina,  radius  r  inches,  in  which  a  circular  hole  tangent  to 

the  circumference  and  of  radius  —  has  been  drilled  (Fig. 

67). 


6S  ANALYTICAL    STATICS 

Solution. — :In  this  case  consider  by  reason  of  symmetry 
that  the  C.  of  G.  of  the  whole  plate  is  at  its  centre,  at 
which  point  its  weight  may  be  considered  as  concen- 
trated. Similarly  for  the  hole,  with  the  exception  that 
the  weight  is  taken  with  the  negative  sign,  signifying 
that  this  weight  has  been  removed  from  the  whole  plate. 

Assume  the  density  of  the  plate  to  be  w  pounds  per 
square  inch;  then  the  weight  of  the  whole  disc  is  xr2w, 

and  of  the  removed  portion  —x-w. 

4 


8     sr. 

x=~iw=~  ~1     ^~\~       ~T=~6m- 


xr2w+[  —  K-W]  i 

4 
and 


I       r2    \ 
-n-w) 

\       4     / 


(  - 
\ 


47 
which  places  the  centroid  at  C,  Fig.  67. 

EXERCISE  87.  Weights  of  i,  2,  and  3  ounces  are  placed  at 
the  vertices  of  an  equilateral  triangle  whose  sides  are  6  inches 
long.     Find  the  distance  of  their  C.  of  G.  from  the  vertices. 
EXERCISE  88.  A  common  form  of  a  cross-section  of  a  reser- 
voir wall  or  embankment  wall  is  a  trapezoid 
whose  top   and   bottom   sides  are  parallel 
(Fig.  68).      If  the  top  side   equals  4  feet, 
bottom  side  8  feet,  and  height  9  feet,  find 
s  Ft.  the   centre   of  gravity  of  the  section  with 

FIG.  68  reference  to  the  left  and  lower  sides.    (Divide 

the  figure  into  a  rectangle  and  a  triangle,  or 
into  two  triangles.  C.  of  G.  of  rectangle  is  at  intersection  of 
diagonals  and  of  triangle  at  intersection  of  medians.) 


FORCES    ACTING    ON    A    RIGID    BODY 


69 


EXERCISE  89.  A  lamina  has  the  form  of  a  square  with  an 
isosceles  triangle  attached  to  one  side.  The  side  of  the  square 
is  a,  the  height  of  the  triangle  is  h.  Find  the  position  of  the 
centre  of  gravity  of  the  figure,  and  determine  the  value  of  h, 
if  the  C.  of  G.  lies  in  the  base  of  the  triangle. 

EXERCISE  90.  Where  must  a  circular  hole  of  one  foot  radius 
be  punched  out  of  a  circular  disc  of  3  foot  radius,  so  that  the 
centre  of  gravity  of  the  remainder  may  be  2  inches  from  the 
centre  of  the  disc? 

EXERCISE  91.  A  circular  disc,  8  inches  in  diameter,  has  a 
hole  2  inches  in  diameter  punched  out  of  it;  the  centre  of  the 
hole  is  3  inches  from  the  circumference  of  the  disc.  Find  the 
C.  of  G.  of  the  remaining  portion. 

EXERCISE  92.  Find  the  centroids  of  the  plates  shown  in 
Fig.  69% 


1 

•  1 
A 

<-!->• 
i 

L_  2I'£ 

4 

-i 

H^ 

=d 

FIG.  69 


SECTION  X 

SUMMARY  OF  THE  METHODS  OF  STATICS 

As  may  be  observed  from  the  preceding  sections,  we 
may  divide  the  methods  employed  in  statics  into  two 
large  classes,  based  upon  the  treatment  of  forces  acting — 
I.  At  a  single  point. 

II.  On  a  rigid  body. 

If  the  forces  acting  at  a  single  point  are  only  three  in 
number,  the  "Triangle  of  Forces"  may  be  used  advan- 
tageously. 


70  ANALYTICAL   STATICS 

If  more  than  three  forces  act  at  a  single  point,  we  may 
best  proceed  by  putting 

2(X- components  of  the  forces)  =o 
and  2(Y- components  of  the  forces)  =o. 

If  the  forces  considered  are  applied  to  a  rigid  body, 
then  they  will  be  in  equilibrium  if 

2(X- components  of  the  forces)  =o, 
J?(F-components  of  the  forces)  =o, 
and    ^(Moments  about  any  point)  =  2(  Yx  —  Xy)  =  o. 

In  dealing  with  rigid  bodies  the  weight  of  the  body 
considered  must  always  be  assumed  as  concentrated  at 
the  centre  of  gravity,  or  centroid,  of  the  body. 

The  method  of  finding  the  centroid  as  developed  in 
Section  IX,  although  universally  true,  can  be  applied  only 
to  a  system  of  concrete  particles  or  to  a  system  of  bodies 
the  positions  of  whose  centroids  are  known  until  the 
student  has  familiarized  himself  with  the  methods  of  the 
calculus. 

//  is  not  always  necessary,  in  dealing  with  the  equilib- 
rium of  the  forces  acting  on  a  rigid  body,  to  write  out  all 
the  equations  for  equilibrium  as  explained  in  Section  VIII. 
It  lies  with  the  ingenuity  of  the  student  to  select  that  one  of 
the  equations  SX  =  o,  IY  =  o,  I  (Moment)  =o  which  will 
involve  only  the  one  unknown  force  sought.  This  is 
illustrated  in  the  following 

Example. — A  straight  rod  10  feet  long,  when  un- 
weighted, balances  about  a  point  4  feet  from  one  end; 


FORCES   ACTING    ON   A    RIGID    BODY 


71 


---      ----  10-Ft;  -------  » 


but  when  loaded  with  20  pounds  at  this  end  and  4  pounds 
at  the  other  it  balances  about  a  point  3  feet  from  the  end. 
Find  the  weight  of  the  rod. 

Solution. — Draw  two  diagrams  representing  the  condi- 
tions of  the  problem; 
and  also  a  diagram 
showing  all  the  forces 
acting  on  the  rod 
(Fig.  70). 

From  the  first  state- 
ment, and  from  the 
definition  of  the  cen- 
troid, we  can  say  that 
the  centroid  of  the  rod 
is  4  feet  from  the  left- 
hand  end,  and  that 
the  weight  W  may  be 
assumed  there  con- 
centrated. 

For  the  solution  of 
this  example  it  will  be  most  convenient  to  write  the 
equation  for  the  moments  about  the  point  of  support 
when  loaded,  for  the  reaction  of  the  support  (an 
unknown  force)  will  then  not  enter  our  equation  of 
moments. 


-"     "10"Ft'-  -------  -* 


X 


FIG.  70 


Thus 


(2o)(3)-(TF)(i)-(4)(7)=o; 
.'.  W  =  32  pounds. 


If  the  reaction  (R)  of  the  support  were  required,  the 
moments  should  have  been  taken  about  the  centroid, 
as  then  the  unknown  weight  would  not  have  entered 


72  ANALYTICAL    STATICS 

our  equation.     Thus 


.'.  R  =  $6  pounds. 

If  the  weight  were  known  and  the  reaction  of  tl.e 
support  were  required, 

IY  =  —  20-}-  R  —  32—  4  =  0 
would  give  the  result 

^  =  56  pounds. 

Solve  each  of  the  following  exercises  by  the  use  of  a 
single  equation. 

EXERCISE  93.  A  weightless  rod  ten  feet  long  is  supported 
at  its  centre.  100  pounds  is  hung  at  one  end  and  200  pounds 
3  feet  from  this  end.  Find  the  pressure  on  the  support  if 
enough  force  is  applied  at  the  other  end  to  hold  the  rod  in 
equilibrium. 

EXERCISE  94.  A  heavy  rod  5  feet  long  has  a  weight  of 
200  pounds  attached  to  one  end  and  is  supported  2  feet  from 
that  end.  What  force  must  be  applied  at  the  other  end  to 
produce  a  pressure  of  150  pounds  on  the  support? 

EXERCISE  95.  —  A  rod  weighing  25  pounds  and  loaded  at 
each  end  with  200  pounds  is  supported  so  as  to  be  in  equilib- 
rium. If  the  unloaded  rod  balances  on  a  knife-edge  placed 
i  foot  from  one  end  and  is  6  feet  long,  find  the  pressure  on 
the  support. 

EXERCISE  96.  A  man  carries  a  load  of  40  pounds  attached 
to  the  end  of  a  stick  resting  on  his  shoulder.  If  the  man 
exerts  a  force  of  20  pounds  at  the  other  end  of  the  stick,  what 
is  the  pressure  on  his  shoulder 

(a)  if  the  stick  is  horizontal  ? 

(b)  if  the  forward  end  of  the  stick  dips  30°  ? 


CHAPTER  III 

APPLICATIONS  OF  THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  STATICS 
TO  THE  SIMPLE  MACHINES 

SECTION  XI 
THE  LEVER  AND  THE  WHEEL  AND  AXLE 

THE  principles  of  statics  as  discussed  in  Chapters  I 
and  II  will  now  be  applied  to  what  are  usually  termed 
simple  machines. 

Any  contrivance  for  making  a  force  applied  to  a  body  at 
a  given  point  and  in  a  given  direction  available  at  some 
other  point  or  in  some  other  direction  is  called  a  machine. 

The  machines  considered  will  all  be  supposed  in 
equilibrium  under  the  applied  force,  the  available  force, 
and  the  reactions  of  the  supports  of  the  machine.  If 
motion  is  desired,  the  applied  force  must  be  slightly 
increased. 

The  ratio  of  the  available  force  to  the  applied  force  is 
called  the  mechanical  advantage  o)  the  machine. 

The  simple  machines  usually  include  the  lever,  the  wheel 
and  axle,  the  pulley,  the  inclined  plane,  the  wedge,  and 
the  screw. 

In  the  solution  of  problems  involving  simple  machines 
no  special  formulae  will  be  deduced  or  required;  each 
case  is  to  be  analyzed,  all  the  forces  acting  are  to  be 

73 


74 


ANALYTICAL    STATICS 


shown,  and  the  required  forces  calculated  in  terms  of  the 
known  forces  and  the  dimensions  of  the  machines  by  the 
direct  application  of  the  principles  of  equilibrium  already 
studied. 

The  Lever 

The  lever  is  a  rod  or  bar,  either  straight  or  curved, 
supported  at  one  point.  This  point  is  called  the  ful- 
crum. 

Example. — A  straight  rod  is  loaded  so  that  its  centroid 

^centroid  js  one  third  of  its  length  from 

JL  X   one  end.     When  weights  of 

(5)  (1(M  i  i 

^-^  \^J  5    and    10   pounds  are   sup- 

ported from  the  ends,  the  rod 

balances  about  the  middle  point.  Find  the  weight  of 
the  rod. 

Solution. — (i)  Draw  a  diagram  illustrating  the  prob- 
lem (Fig.  71). 

(2)  Draw  a  sketch  showing  all  forces  acting  on  the 
rod  (Fig.  72);  these  |y 

include  the  reaction  of 
the    fulcrum    and  the  c  !. 

weight. 

Assume  the  origin  of 
moments  so  as  to  ex- 
clude from  the  moment 
equation  (2M  =  o)  the 


•1 

f 

R 

I" 

FIG. 

72 

requ 

lired.     Then 

=  I5  pounds. 


APPLICATIONS   TO    SIMPLE    MACHINES 


75 


EXERCISE  97.  A  lever  is  to  be  cut  from  a  bar  weighing  3 
pounds  per  foot.  What  must  be  its  length  that  it  may  bal- 
ance about  a  point  2  feet  from  one  end,  when  weighted  at 
this  end  with  50  pounds  ? 

EXERCISE  98.  A  straight  lever  6  feet  long  wreighs  10  pounds, 
and  its  centre  of  gravity  is  4  feet  from  one  end.  What  weight 
at  this  end  will  support  20  pounds  at  the  other  when  the  lever 
is  supported  at  one  foot  from  the  latter,  and  what  is  the 
pressure  on  the  fulcrum  ? 

EXERCISE  99.  A  lever  is  supported  at  its  centroid,  which  is 
nearer  to  one  end  than  the  other.  A  weight  P  at  the  end  of 
the  shorter  arm  is  balanced  by  2  pounds  at  the  end  of  the 
longer;  and  the  same  weight  P  at  the  longer  arm  is  balanced 
by  1 8  pounds  at  the  shorter.  Find  P. 

EXERCISE  100.  In  a  pair  of  nut-crackers  the  nut  is  placed 
one  inch  from" the  hinge;  the  hand  is  applied  at  a  distance 
of  6  inches  from  the  hinge.  How  much  pressure  must  be 
applied  by  the  hand  if  the  nut  requires  a  pressure  of  20 
pounds  to  break  it,  and  what  will  be  the  force  acting  on  the 
hinge  ? 

EXERCISE  101.  The  oar  of  a  boat  is  io£  feet  long;  the  row- 
lock is  2j  feet  from  the  end.  A  man  applies  a  force  of  70 
pounds  at  2  feet  from  the  rowlock;  the  average  pressure  of 
the  water  is  exerted  at  6  inches  from  the  other  end  of  the 
oar.  Find  the  force  urging  the  boat  forward,  and  the  total 
pressure  of  the  water  on  the  blade  of  the  oar. 

The  balance  (Fig.  73) 
in  its  simplest  form  is  a 
lever  which  turns  very 
freely  about  a  fulcrum  F. 
It  is  used  for  comparing 
the  weights  of  two  bodies. 
A  balance  is  true  if  the 
beam  is  horizontal  when- 


FIG.  7.3 


ever  equal  masses  are  placed  in  the  sc^le-pans  PPt \ 


76  ANALYTICAL    STATICS 

EXERCISE  102.  Find  the  condition  that  a  balance  may  be 
true. 

EXERCISE  103.  A  false  balance  rests  with  the  beam  hori- 
zontal when  unloaded,  but  the  arms  are  not  of  equal  lengths. 
A  weight  W  when  hung  at  the  end  of  the  shorter  arm,  b,  bal- 
ances a  weight  P,  and  when  hung  at  the  end  of  the  longer 
arm,  a,  it  balances  a  third  weight,  Q.  Find  the  correct  weight 
of  W. 

Can  you  suggest  another  way  of  ascertaining  correctly  the 
weight  of  W  ? 

EXERCISE  104.  The  arms  of  a  false  balance  are  in  the  ratio 
of  20  to  21.  What  will  be  the  loss  to  a  tradesman  who  places 
articles  to  be  weighed  at  the  end  of  the  shorter  arm  if  he  is 
asked  for  4  pounds  of  goods  priced  at  $1.50  per  pound? 

The  Common,  or  Roman,  Steelyard  (Fig.  74)  con- 
sists of  a  lever  support- 
ed on  knife-edges  at  D. 
The  object  to  be  weighed 
is  placed  at  W,  and  the 
distance  of  Q  from  the 
fulcrum  is  adjusted  until 
the  lever  is  horizontal. 

The  centroid,  C,  of  the  lever  and  scale-pan  does  not 
usually  coincide  with  the  point  of  suspension  D. 
Example. — To  graduate  the  steelyard. 
Assume  the  weight  of  the  lever  to  be  w.     With  no  load 
at  W  adjust  Q  until  the  lever  is  horizontal;    then  x  =  a. 

Thus  I(M)=wy-Qa  =  o. 

Now  assume  a  load  W  in  the  pan;  then 


APPLICATIONS    TO    SIMPLE    MACHINES 


77 


In  this  equation  d,  <2,  and  a  are  known  quantities  to  be 
determined  by  experiment;  the  variable  quantities  are 
W  and  x. 


Assume 


then 


c/  =  3  inches, 
Q  =  6  pounds, 
a  =  2  inches; 
6#  —  12, 


This  is  the  equation  of  the  straight  line  plotted  in  Fig.  75. 
Assuming  any  value  of  W  we  obtain  a  certain  value  of  x. 


FIG.  75 

If  W  =  o,  then  00  =  2,  so  that  when  the  steelyard  is  un- 
loaded Q  must  be  placed  2  inches  from  D. 

If  W  =  i>  then  x  =  $/2  inches.  If  W  =  2,  then  #  =  3 
inches,  etc. 

The  zero  mark  would  then  be  placed  at  2  inches  to  the 
right  of  D,  the  one-pound  mark  1/2  inch  farther  to  tie 
right,  the  two-pound  mark  1/2  inch  still  farther,  etc. 


78  ANALYTICAL    STATICS 

If  now,  instead  of  measuring  x  from  D,  x  be  measured 
from  E,  the  zero  mark,  the  equation  W  =  2X  —  4  would 
have  to  be  transformed  to  a  new  set  of  axes  Wf,  x'  (Fig. 
75),  so  that  W  =  Wf  and  x  =  x*  +2;  whence 


-4,  or 
If  now  W  =  W'  = 


If,  in  the  equation  W'  =  2oc*,  x'  is  given  a  minus  value, 
that  is,  is  measured  to  the  left  of  the  zero  mark,  the  value 
W'  =  W  becomes  minus  (Fig.  75). 

The  physical  interpretation  of  this  is  that  instead  of  a 
weight  an  upward  push  must  be  supplied  at  W  to  pro- 
duce equilibrium. 

EXERCISE  105.  In  a  common  steelyard  the  pan  is  supported 
3  inches  to  one  side  of  the  fulcrum,  and  the  center  of  gravity 
is  i  inch  to  the  other  side.  The  weight  of  the  lever  is  3  pounds, 
that  of  the  movable  constant  weight  is  2  pounds.  What  is 
the  smallest  load  that  can  be  weighed  ? 

The  Danish  Steelyard  (Fig-.  76)  consists  of  a  bar 
A  A  I    ^/ 


•p  w 

FIG.  76 

terminating  in  a  ball.     The  load  is  placed  at  W,  and 
the  fulcrum  F  is  moved  until  equilibrium  is  established. 

EXERCISE  106.  Graduate  a  Danish  steelyard,  assuming  the 
distance  from  the  load  to  the  centroid  to  be  12  inches  and 
the  weight  of  bar  and  scale-pan  20  pounds. 


APPLICATIONS   TO    SIMPLE    MACHINES 


79 


00= 


The  Wheel  and  Axle 

consists  of  a  wheel  or  drum  of  considerable  diameter 
to  which  is  rigidly  attached  a  drum  or  axle  of  smaller 
diameter.  Both  drums  turn 
freely  upon  the  same  axis 

(Fig.  77)- 
A   rope   is    coiled    around 

each  drum,  one  clockwise,  and 

the  other  counter-clockwise. 
The  forces   are   applied  to 

these    ropes.     An   end   view 

of  this  machine  is  shown  in    Fig.   78,    from    which  it 

may  be  seen  that  the  wheel 
and  axle  is  simply  a  lever 
with  fulcrum  F  at  the  axis. 

The  wheel  and  axle  may 
be  called  a  continuous  lever; 
for,  if  motion  results,  new 
radii  take  the  place  of  the 
ones  previously  in  use  and  the 
machine  operates  as  before. 


FIG.  77 


FIG.  78 


1  EXERCISE  107.    In    a    wheel 

and  axle  the  diameter  of  the 
wheel  is  10  feet  and  the  radius 
of  the  axle  is  18  inches.  A 
force  of  100  pounds  is  applied 
to  the  rope  coiled  about  the  axle.  Find  the  available  force 
at  the  end  of  the  rope  coiled  about  the  wheel  if  this  rope 
leaves  on  a  horizontal  tangent.  Find,  also,  the  mechanical 
advantage.  What  pressure  do  the  bearings  sustain? 

EXERCISE  108.  In  a  wheel  and  axle  the  radius  of  the  wheel 
is  3  feet.     The  axle  is  of  square  section,  the  side  of  the  square 


30  ANALYTICAL    STATICS 

being  6  inches  long.  Find  (a)  the  greatest  and  (b)  the  least 
vertical  power  that  must  be  exerted  to  slowly  lift  a  weight  of 
252  pounds  attached  to  the  rope  coiled  around  the  wheel.  If 
the  wheel  and  axle  weighs  150  pounds,  what  is  the  pressure 
on  the  bearings  ? 

EXERCISE  109.  The  circumference  of  a  wheel  is  60  inches, 
the  diameter  of  the  axle  is  5  inches.  What  force  must  be 
applied  to  the  circumference  of  the  axle  to  support  100  pounds 
at  the  circumference  of  the  wheel  ? 

SECTION  XII 
THE    PULLEY 

The  pulley  is  a  small  wheel  with  a  groove  cut  in  its 
outer  edge.  The  pulley  can  turn  on  an  axis  through  its 
centre;  the  ends  of  this  axis  are  carried  by  a  block  within 
which  the  pulley  turns.  If  the  block  is  so  fastened  as 
to  be  immovable,  the  pulley  is  said  to 
be  "fixed";  otherwise  the  pulley  is 
designated  as  "movable." 

Fig.  79  shows  a  fixed  pulley;    the 
applied     force     is     F    pounds,    the 
available  force  is  W  pounds. 
Example.  —  Calculate    F   and    the 

reaction  of  the  staple  supporting  the 
FIG.  79 

block. 

Solution. — Fig.  80  shows  the  forces  acting  upon  the 
pulley.  R  is  the  force  transmitted  by  the  block  from 
the  staple  to  the  axis  of  the  pulley. 

Since  three  forces  acting  in  equilibrium  upon  a  rigid 
body  (pulley)  have  their  lines  of  action  meeting  in  a 
point  (page  60),  Fig.  81  may  be  used  to  represent  the 
forces. 


APPLICATIONS   TO    SIMPLE    MACHINES  8 1 

Using  Cj  Fig.  80,  as  the  origin  of  moments,  we  have 

2M  =  Fr— Wr  =  o',     .'.  F  =  W. 
In  Fig.  81,  assuming  the  x  and  y  axes  as  shown, 


as,  by  Geometry, 


FIG.  80 


FIG.  81 


EXERCISE  no.  Find  the  force  necessary  to  sustain  a  weight 
of  100  pounds  by  means  of  a  fixed  pulley;  find  also  the  mag- 
nitude and  direction  of  the  force  on  the  staple  to  which  the 
pulley  is  fastened,  if  the  applied  force  makes  an  angle  of 
(a)  o°,  (b)  30°,  (c)  90°,  (d)  150°  with  the  vertical. 

From  the  above  it  follows  that  a  fixed  pulley  has  a 
mechanical  advantage  of  unity  (it  does  not  increase  the 
available  over  the  applied  force)  :  it  simply  changes 
the  direction  of  the  applied  force. 

EXERCISE  in.  Design  a  system  of  fixed  pulleys  by  means 
of  which  a  horse  walking  on  horizontal  ground  may  raise  a 
bale  of  hay  weighing  200  pounds  from  the  ground  to  a  ver- 


82  ANALYTICAL   STATICS 

tical  height  of  20  feet.     Show  by  diagrams  all  the  forces  acting 
on  the  various  pulleys. 

In  Fig.  82  a  movable  pulley  is  shown. 
Example. — Assuming  the  pulley,  Fig.  82,  to  weigh  w 
pounds,  find  the  force  F  necessary  to  sustain  the  weight  W. 


FIG.  82 


FIG.  84 


Solution.  —  Fig.  83  shows  all  forces  acting  on  the  pul- 
ley, T  representing  the  tension  in  the  rope. 
Taking  moments  about  C, 


From  Fig.  84, 


=o;    /.  F=T. 


=  F  cos  d+F  cos  d-W-iv=o; 


2  COS  6' 


EXERCISE  112.  Find  the  force  necessary  to  sustain  a  weight 
of  100  pounds  by  means  of  a  single  movable  pulley;  also,  find 
direction  and 'magnitude  of  the  force  acting  on  the  staple  sup- 
porting one  end  of  the  rope  if  the  force  makes  an  angle  of 
(a)  90°,  (b)  35°,  (c)  o°  with  the  horizon. 


APPLICATIONS  TO  SIMPLE  MACHINES 


System  of  Pulleys 

Various  combinations  of  pulleys  are  in  use.  For  con- 
venience we  shall  designate  three  important  systems  as 
the  first,  second,  and  third;  these  systems  are  illustrated 
in  Figs.  85,  86,  and  87,  respectively. 


i    w    I 


FIG.  85 


FIG.  86 


FIG.  87 


In  finding  the  various  forces  acting  in  a  system  of 
pulleys,  it  should  be  remembered  that  ike  tension  in  any 
one  string  is  the  same  throughout  its  length,  and  that  each 
portion  of  the  system  may  be  considered  in  equilibrium 
by  itself. 

Example. — Find  the  force  necessary  to  sustain  a  weight 
W  by  means  of  the  third  system  if  one  movable  pulley 
(weighing  w  pounds)  is  used.  Also  find  the  pull  on  the 
staple  if  the  fixed  pulley  weighs  w{  pounds. 


84 


ANALYTICAL    STATICS 


Solution. — The  machine  is  shown  in  Fig.  88. 

Consider  first  the  equilibrium  of  the  movable  pulley, 
Fig.  89,  where  /,  ti  represent  the  tensions  in  the  several 
strings. 


FIG.  88  FIG.  89  FIG.  90  FIG.  91 

The  equilibrium  of  the  weight  gives  (Fig.  90) 


,    and 


W-w 


Consider  now  the  equilibrium  of  the  fixed  pulley,  Fig. 


91 


or 


2Y=R-ti-w1-ti=o;    /.  ^  = 


^W-qw 
3 


EXERCISE  113.  What  force  is  necessary  to  sustain  a  weight 
of  1000  pounds  by  means  of  the  first  system  of  pulleys,  using 
two  movable  pulleys  and  regarding  them  as  weightless? 
What  is  the  pull  upon  each  point  of  support? 


APPLICATIONS  TO  SIMPLE  MACHINES 


EXERCISE  114.  Same  as  Exercise  113,  considering  each  pul- 
ley to  weigh  20  pounds. 

EXERCISE  115.  What  weight  will  a  force  of  10  pounds  applied 
to  the  first  system,  containing  five  weightless  pulleys,  support  ? 

EXERCISE  116.  A  force  of  20  pounds  applied  to  the  second 
system,  containing  two  pulleys  in  the  movable 
block  with  the  rope  fastened  to  the  fixed  block, 
will  sustain  what  weight  ?     What  is  the  pull  on 
the  point  of  support  ? 

EXERCISE  117.  Same  as  Exercise  116,  but 
having  the  rope  fastened  to  the  movable  block. 

EXERCISE  118.  A  system  of  the  third  class 
has  three  weightless  movable  pulleys.  What 
weight  will  a  force  of  10  pounds  sustain,  and 
what  is  the  tension  in  the  staple  ? 

EXERCISE  119.  Same  as  Exercise  118,  if 
each  pulley  weighs  2  pounds. 

EXERCISE  120.  In  the  system  illustrated  in 
Fig.  92  find  the  force,  necessary  to  sustain  100 
pounds,  and  the  pull  on  the  staples,  if  each 
pulley  weighs  4  pounds. 


FIG.  92 


SECTION  XIII 

THE   INCLINED    PLANE   AND    THE   WEDGE 

Any  plane  inclined  to  the  horizon  is  an  inclined 
plane. 

In  solving  problems  involving  inclined  planes,  it  is 
simply  necessary  to  consider  the  equilibrium  of  the  weight, 
considered  as  a  particle,  upon  the  plane.  Care  should 
be  taken  not  to  neglect  the  normal  reaction  of  the  plane, 
and,  if  friction  is  involved,  the  friction  jorce. 

The  inclination  of  a  plane  is  usually  denoted  by  the 
angle  it  makes  with  the  horizon.  When  referring  to 


86  ANALYTICAL  STATICS 

roads  or  railways  the  inclination  is  generally  expressed 
as  the  grade  of  the  incline,  which  means  the  ratio  of  the 
height  to  the  length.  Thus  on  a  "five  per  cent  grade" 
a  rise  of  5  feet  would  be  obtained  on  walking  100  feet 
up  the  incline. 

Less  frequently  the  term  pitch  is  used  to  denote  the 
ratio  of  the  height  to  the  base. 

EXERCISE  121.  What  force  acting  parallel  to  the  plane  is 
needed  to  support  two  tons  on  a  smooth  incline,  if  the  grade 
is  8  per  cent? 

EXERCISE  122.  Same  as  Exercise  121,  if  the  coefficient  of 
friction  is  0.3. 

EXERCISE  123.  The  pitch  of  a  plane  is  0.25,  and  the  coeffi- 
cient of  friction  between  a  certain  body  and  the  plane  is  0.35. 
Will  the  body,  if  placed  on  the  plane,  slide  down  or  remain 
at  rest  ?  What  will  be  the  friction  force  exerted  ? 

EXERCISE  124.  A  weight  rests  on  a  smooth  inclined  plane. 
Show  that  the  least  force  which  will  keep  it  in  equilibrium 
must  act  along  the  plane.  (Assume  a  force  acting  at  an 
angle  6  with  the  plane  and  show  that  6  is  zero  for  a  minimum 
force.) 

EXERCISE  125.  Two  unequal  weights  W\  and  W2  on  a 
rough  inclined  plane  are  connected  by  a  string  which  passes 
over  a  smooth  pulley  in  the  plane.  Find  the  greatest  inclina- 
tion of  the  plane  consistent  with  equilibrium,  in  terms  of  Wi, 
W2,  and  the  coefficients  of  friction  /*i  and  /*2. 

EXERCISE  126.  Two  rough  bodies  W\  and  W2  rest  upon  an 
inclined  plane  and  are  connected  by  a  string  parallel  to  the 
plane.  If  the  coefficient  of  friction  is  not  the  same  for  both, 
determine  the  greatest  inclination  and  the  tension  of  the  string, 
consistent  with  equilibrium,  in  terms  of  W1}  W2,  and  the  co- 
efficients of  friction  //i  and  j*2. 


APPLICATIONS    TO    SIMPLE    MACHINES 


The  Wedge 

This  machine  consists  of  a  double  inclined  plane  made 
of  some  hard  material,  such  as 
iron  or  steel.  It  is  used  for 
splitting  wood,  or  overcoming 
great  resistances  over  short  dis- 
tances. In  Fig.  93,  ABC  repre- 
sents a  wedge.  The  applied 

force,  F,  acts  normally  to  J5C;    the    available  force  will 
be  a  force  equal  and  opposite  to  R,  normal  to  AB. 

Example. — Assuming  the  angle  shown  in  Fig.  93,  and 
all  surfaces  to  be  frictionless,  find  the  relation  existing 
between  R  and  F. 

Solution. — Fig.  94  shows  all  forces  acting  on  the  wedge, 
N  being  the  normal  resultant  of  the  reactions  of  the  plane 
MN  on  AC. 


FIG    94 


FIG.  95 


P 
FIG.  96 


Three  forces  to  be  in  equilibrium  must  always  act 
through  one  point.  Therefore  Fig.  95  truly  represents 
the  forces,  and  by  the  principle  of  the  triangle  of  forces 
Fig.  96  is  obtained. 

From  which  we  have 
F 


or 


F=R  sin  a. 


88 


ANALYTICAL    STATICS 


EXERCISE  127.  In  the  wedge  shown  in  Fig.  97  find  the 
relation  between  F  and  P  in  terms  of  the  angles  a,  /?,  and  0. 
All  surfaces  to  be  considered  smooth,  and  GG  being  guides 
preventing  lateral  motion  of  the  rod  transmitting  the  force  P. 

Hint. — Find  a  force  R 
normal  to  AB  balancing  F 
and  then  consider  the  rod 
as  a  free  body  with  a  force 
"^__  e(lual  and  opposite  to  R 
acting  upon  it  together 
with  the  reactions  of  the 
guides,  etc. 

EXERCISE  128.  A  wedge 
in  the  form  of  a  right  triangle,  whose  sides  are  5,  4,  and  3, 
is  driven  by  a  horizontal  force  of  300  pounds,  applied  nor- 
mally to  side  3,  along  a  horizontal  plane.  What  weight, 
supported  so  as  to  prevent  its  moving  horizontally,  may  be 
lifted  if  applied  to  the  side  5,  friction  neglected? 

EXERCISE  129.  In  Fig.  97,  assuming  a:  =  45°,  #=30°,  /?=i2o°) 
and  P=5oo  pounds,  find  P. 

Action  of  the  Wedge,  including  Friction 

In  Fig.  98  let  A  BCD  be  the  wedge  driven  by  a  for^e  P 
along  the  plane  MN,  HE  a 
block  sliding  upon  AB,  and 
GG  a  fixed  guide  preventing 
the  horizontal  motion  of  HE. 

Let  6  be  the  inclination 
of  AB,  and  /*,  /*i,  //2  the  co- 
efficients of  friction  at  the 
surfaces  DC,  AB,  and  GG, 
respectively.  FIG.  98 

The  problem  consists  in  finding  the  relation  between  P 
and  Q,  assuming  the  wedge  and  block  HE  as  weightless. 


APPLICATIONS    TO    SIMPLE    MACHINES 


89 


In  Figs.  99  and  100  are  shown  the  wedge  and  block 
respectively,  with  all  forces  acting  on  the  same. 
From  Fig.  99, 


cos  6  =  0,    .     (i) 

=  0.     .       .       .       (2) 

\y    i 

uLt 


s 

Ff/AaS 


-J7**? 

FIG.  roo 
From  Fig.  100, 

ri  sin  6  +  fiiNi  cos  6—S=Oj    .     . 
ri  cos  0  —  /£; ATi  sin  6  —  Q  —  jj>2S  =  o. 
From  (i)  and  (2),  by  elimination  of  R, 

sin  6  +  (u+  «i)  cos  01  JVi. 


(3) 
(4) 


From  (3)  and  (4),  by  elimination  of  5, 
Q  =  [(i  -  &  p2)  cos  6  -  O  + 1*2)  sin 

P       (i  —  /*/*i )  sin  0  +  (p.  +  fti )  cos 


"  Q      (J  ~  ftP*)  cos  ^-  (/«i  +  j"2)  sin 
which  is  the  required  solution. 


90  ANALYTICAL    STATICS 

If  the  coefficients  of  friction  are  equal,  or  jj.  =  /*i  =  /*2  = 
tan  a,  where  a  is  the  angle  of  friction  (see  page  34), 

sin  0       2fi 
P     (i  —  //2)  sin  6 -\-2fj.  cos  6        cos  6     i  —  fi2 


dn  d  /  2fji    \  sin  0 

~  \i-//2/  cos  0 


tan  #  +  tan  2a 
=  —  — -0  =  tan 

i  —tan  20.  tan  0 

by  the  trigonometric  relations 

2  tan 


tan  2X  = 


tan  #  +  tan 
and  tan  ( 


i  —  tan  x  tan  y 

EXERCISE  130.  Find  the  relation  of  P  to  Q  in  the  machine 
shown  in  Fig.  98,  if  Q  is  applied  normally  to  AB  by  means 
of  a  block  restrained  from  moving  parallel  to  AB. 


FIG.  101 


EXERCISE  131.  Find  P,  if  Q  =  iooo  pounds,  and  the  coeffi- 
cient of  friction  ^  =  0.2,  and  ^1  =  0.4,  from  the  wedge  shown 
in  Fig.  101,  where  A  ABC  is  isosceles  and  /.ABC-  60°. 


APPLICATIONS    TO    SIMPLE    MACHINES 


91 


SECTION  XIV 

MISCELLANEOUS  MACHINES 

The  Bent-lever  Balance. — This  balance  is  shown  in 
Fig.  102,  where  ABC  is  the  bent  lever  turning  about  a 
pivot'at  B.  D  is  the  index  Nf 
which  points  to  some  division 
on  the  graduated  arc  MDN. 
C  is  the  centroid  of  the  lever 
CBA. 

EXERCISE  132.  Find  the  rela- 
tion existing  between  <£  and  W, 
if  W  is  the  load  in  the  pan  and 
<j>  is  the  angle  through  which 
BC  is  displaced  from  its  position,  when  W=o,  by  the  load  W. 
Assume  as  constants  of  the  balance  BC  =  a,  BA=b,  w= weight 
of  pan,  Wi=  weight  of  lever  CBA,  and  that  when  W=o  the 
end  A  is  on  a  horizontal  through 
B  while  BC  makes  an  angle  (3  to 
the  vertical. 

EXERCISE  133.  Find  the  relation 
between  F  and  W  in  the  combi- 
nation of  levers  shown  in  Fig.  103. 

6-'—- 


FIG.  102 


FIG.  103 

EXERCISE  134.  Find  the  weight,  W,  that  can  be  sustained 
by  a  force  of  100  pounds  and  the  pull  on  each  point  of  sup- 
port in  the  combination  of  pulleys  shown  in  Fig.  104,  if  the 


9  2  ANALYTICAL    STATICS 

movable  pulleys  weigh  5  pounds  each  and  the  fixed  pulleys  3 
pounds  each. 

The  Differential  Wheel  and  Axle. — This  machine  is 
shown  in  Fig.  105.  It  is  similar  to  the  wheel  and  axle, 
but  instead  of  one  axle  it  has  two  of  different  diameters 
with  the  same  rope  coiled  in  opposite  directions  around 
them.  In  the  loop  of  this  rope  hangs  a  single  movable 
pulby  to  which  the  weight  is  attached. 


FIG.  105 


FIG.  106 


FIG.  107         FIG.  108 


An  end  view  of  the  machine  is  shown  in  Fig.  106,  and 
the  forces  acting  on  the  separate  parts  in  Figs.  107  and 
1  08,  where  T  represents  the  tension  in  the  rope. 

Taking  moments  about  C,  Fig.  107,  we  have 


From  Fig.  108, 


Thus, 


=  2T-W  =  o',     /.  T=-. 

2 

w 

=  T(R-r)=—(R-r)9 


P  = 


W(R-r) 


2(1 


APPLICATIONS    TO    SIMPLE    MACHINES  93 

From  this  equation  it  should  be  noted  that  the  nearer 
r  =  R  the  smaller  does  P  become  until  R  =  r  when  P  =  o. 

EXERCISE  135.  In  a  differential  wheel  and  axle  the  radius 
of  the  wheel  is  3  feet,  and  the  radii  of  the  axles  20  inches  and 
18  inches  respectively;  find  the  weight  sustained,  and  the 
pressure  on  the  bearings,  if  applied  force  is  200  pounds. 

A  form  of  Platform  Scales  is  shown  in  Fig.  109.  The 
levers  are  so  arranged  that  x  pounds  at  A  balance  the 

ABC 


W 

P 

j 

AM                  || 

D 

G 

FIG.  109 

N 

same  load  W  wherever  it  may  be  put  on  the  platform. 
This  result  is  secured  by  making  the  horizontal  arms 
EM  and  NH  equal,  and  also  EF  equal  to  GH. 

In  this  machine  there  are  three  fulcrums.at  B,  E,  and 
H,  while  the  platform  rests  on  the  levers  EF  and  DH 
at  M  and  N  respectively. 

EXERCISE  136.  Assume  the  distances  (Fig.  109)  as  follows: 
EF  =  GH=io  ft.,  EM  =  NH  =  2  ft.,  HD  =  2$  ft.,  BC=i 
inch,  AB  =  $o  inches.  Find  x,  if  W  =  $  tons  and  is  placed 
(a)  at  the  centre  of  the  platform,  (b)  one  foot  from  the  left 
edge  of  the  platform. 

The  combination  of  levers  shown  in  Fig.  no  is  some- 
times called  a  knee.  This  machine  can  be  used  to 
advantage  where  very  great  pressure  is  required  to  act 
through  very  small  space  only,  as  in  coining  money,  in 
the  printing-press,  etc. 

At  A  and  D  are  fixed  pivots,  and  the  levers  AB  and  DC 
are  joined  by  pins  to  BC  at  B  and  C. 


94 


ANALYTICAL    STATICS 


As  EC  transmits  force  only  in  the  direction  EC,  the 
forces  acting  upon  the  levers  AE  and  DC  can  be  repre- 
sented as  in  Fig.  in. 

EXERCISE  137.  In  Fig.  no,  assuming  Z  CA  B  =  Z  EC  A  = 
30°,  AH  =  10  inches,  AC  =  $  feet,  DC  =  2  feet,  and 


FIG.  no 


feet,  find  pressure  at  K  produced  by  a  horizontal  force  of 
100  pounds  acting  at  H. 

EXERCISE  138.  Draw  diagrams  showing  the  forces  acting 
on  the  fixed  points  A  and  D  and  on  the  bar  EC. 

EXERCISE  139.  Calculate  the  direction  and  magnitude  of 
the  forces  acting  at  A  and  D  due  to  the  force  given  in 
Exercise  137. 


GRAPHICAL  STATICS 


CHAPTER  IV 
GRAPHICAL  ARITHMETIC 

SECTION  XV 
SUMMATION,  DIVISION,  AND  MULTIPLICATION 

THE  theory  of  statics  and  the  solution  of  statical  prob- 
lems has  already  been  considered.  The  results,  however, 
were  obtained  by  the  use  of  analytical  methods.  Methods 
for  solving  statical  problems  graphically  will  now  be 
developed. 

As  an  introduction,  some  problems  in  Graphical  Arith- 
metic will  first  be  considered. 

Numbers  may  be  represented  by  the  lengths  of  lines 
drawn  to  some  scale.  Thus, . • • i •  repre- 
sents 5. 

If  plus  and  minus  numbers  are  to  be  used,  some  as- 
sumption as  to  signs  becomes  necessary.  It  will  be  as- 
sumed that  plus  numbers  are  to  be  shown  by  lines  drawn 
to  the  right,  and  minus  numbers  by  lines  drawn  to  the 

Q5 


g  6  GRAPHICAL  STATICS 

lejt.     Thus,   —  •  -  •  —  >  represents  +3,  and 

represents  —3,  the  arrow-head  being  used  to  show  direc- 

tion. 

Summation  (addition  and  subtraction)  is  performed 
graphically  by  placing  the  arrows  representing  the  num- 
bers to  be  summed  tail  to  head,  and  measuring  the  dis- 
tance between  the  tail  of  the  first  and  the  head  of  the 
last  arrow,  care  being  taken  to  denote  the  direction  of 
this  line  by  the  appropriate  sign.  Thus  3  +  2  —  4  is  repre- 

sented graphically  by  --  '    °  .'      s;       \      N,and  equals  —  , 


EXERCISE  140.  Sum  graphically: 


(b)  -6+4-5  +  7-2. 

(c)  12-3-4  +  2-10+5. 

EXERCISE  141.  Rewrite  each  sum  in  Exercise  140,  changing 
the  order  of  the  terms,  and  then  again  sum  graphically. 

Multiplication,  when  performed  graphically,  must  always 
be  preceded  by  Division. 

In  order  to  perform  division,  it  is  necessary  to  use  lines 
drawn  vertically,  and  another  assumption  as  to  signs 
must  be  made.  Assume  lines  drawn  upward  as  plus  and 
downward  as  minus. 

Then  2-^-3  is  shown  graphically  in  Fig.   112.     The 
dividend   is  placed   vertically,   the  divisor  horizontally, 
^S  always  tail  to  head.      The  tail  of  the 
dividend  is  then  joined  to  the  head  of 
2-1     /"'  the  divisor.      The  quotient,   although 

not  drawn  in  Fig.  112,  is  the  tangent 
of  the  angle  6,   for   tan  0  =  §.      This 
quotient  may  be  obtained  graphically  by  multiplying  by 


GRAPHICAL    ARITHMETIC 


97 


one.  In  Fig.  113  this  is  done  by  making  the  multiplier 
a  continuation  of  the  divisor.  Then  x,  the  required 
quotient,  is  drawn  vertically  to  meet  the  sloping  line. 


EXERCISE  142.  Prove  geometrically  that  in  Fig.  113  x=— . 

Example. — Find  graphically  x  = . 

o 


'       -4  - 


\ 

\ 
\ 
\ 

x 

\  1 

...-*..       t* 

•5   '    *p* 

>" 

FIG.  115 

+3'     \1x 

X              ' 
\       s 

FIG.  114 

.  o    .        ,  .'fo 


FIG.  113 


Solution  in  Fig.  114  shows  —4-5-3  to  obtain  the  dotted 
line,  then  the  multiplication  by  unity  to  obtain  x. 

EXERCISE  143.  Find  graphically: 

(a)  x=;     (J)  *-^;     (c)  x-=±. 


Example. — Find  graphically  x  = 

s 

The  solution  in  Fig.  115  is  obtained  by  dividing  3  by 
5,  thus  obtaining  the  direction  of  the  sloping  line,  then 
multiplying  by  (  —  6),  as  above  explained,  to  find  x. 

EXERCISE  144.  Find  x  graphically: 


~3 


GRAPHICAL    STATICS 


It  is  important  to  note  that  the  triangles  used  in  mul- 
tiplication and  division  need  not  be  right-angled.     Thus, 

x  =  may  be  found  from  each  of  the  Figs.  116  to  118. 


EXERCISE  145.  Give  a  geometric  proof  that  x=-^--   for 
the  construction  shown  in  each  of  the  figures  from  116  to  118. 


2       / 


r'lG.  117 


FIG.  118 


Example.— Find  graphically  *  =  /_   w_   y      To  find 
x  the  form  of  the  expression  should  first  be  changed  to 


x 


(-3) 


Then  find  y  =  -r  —  \,  as  shown  in  Fig.  119,  and  then 

(  —  $) 


#  =—  -  as  shown  in  Fig.  120.     Or,  better,  we  may  solve 

the  entire  problem  in  one  diagram  by  combining  Figs. 
119  and  1  20,  as  in  Fig.  121. 


GRAPHICAL   ARITHMETIC  99 

From  the  preceding  work  it  becomes  evident  that,  in 
performing  multiplication  and  division  graphically,  the 
problem  must  be  put  in  a  fractional  form,  in  which  the 
numerator  always  contains  one  more  factor  than  the 
denominator.  This  may  be  accomplished  by  the  intro- 

duction of  unit  factors.     Thus,  x=  should  be 


put  in  the  form  *- 


>-"f 

2&TLT 


FIG.  119  FIG.  120  FIG.  121 

Again,  in  x  =  -  -  an  inconveniently  large  diagram  would 
result  if  the  form  be  changed  to  x=  .  x  .  This  may 
be  avoided  by  factoring;  thus  x=  /2\/L\  • 

EXERCISE  146.  Find  x  graphically: 

,.t  -_(3)(4)(S).   ,n  «_MM.    (,)  X=M. 

4 

(/)  *- 


EXERCISE  147.  Find  x  graphically: 


. 

—  -jp^j-:  -  (-3)(-5)  • 

«>  «  ^ 


100  GRAPHICAL   STATICS 

EXERCISE  148.  By  means  of  cross-section  paper  find  x,  y, 
and  z.     In  each  case  select  an  appropriate  scale. 


.        _ 


(6375)(3957) 
=  (.087)  (.0035)  (.01975) 
(-.029)000995) 


SECTION  XVI 

COMBINED   MULTIPLICATION  AND   SUMMATION 

Consider  now  a  problem  such  as  u  =  —      —  -  —     —  . 

It  is  found  most  convenient  to  change  the  given  expres- 
sion into  one  composed  of  parts  similar  to  those  already 

solved;     thus,    u=——  +  ~-+-^-.     Instead    of    solving 
o          o          o 

each  term  separately  and  then  summing  the  results,  it 
is  more  convenient  to  perform  all 
the  divisions  in  one  diagram 
(Fig.  122). 

Here    P    (called    the    Pole)    is 
selected  anywhere  at    a    distance 
8  from  the  line  along  which  2,  4, 
P  and  6  are  set  off,  and  the   rays 
'     drawn  from  P  to  the  extremities 


of  2,  4,  6.     The  division  is  then 
performed    as    in    the    left-hand 

portion  of  Fig.  118. 
FIG.  122  ..... 

To  perform  the    multiplication 

the  rays  in  Fig.  122  could  be  prolonged  (Fig.  123)  and 
the  distance  3,  5,  7  laid  down  horizontally  and  lines  x, 


GRAPHICAL    ARITHMETIC 


101 


y,   z   located   between  their  proper   rays   and   at   their 
proper  distance  from  P,  as  in  Fig.  118. 


FIG.  123 

By  this  construction  the  lines  x,  y,  z  will  not  fall  in 
the  same,  straight  line,  and  therefore  their  sum  is  not 
found  directly.  A  more  con- 
venient  construction  is  shown  in 
Fig.  124.  Here  at  any  point,  O, 
in  a  vertical  line  OM,  construct 
a  triangle  similar  to  the  one 
with  base  2  in  Fig.  123,  but 
with  altitude  3,  thus  obtaining 
x.  This  is  most  conveniently 
done  by  drawing  the  sides  of 
the  triangle  parallel  to  the 
corresponding  rays  of  Fig.  122. 
Next  construct  a  triangle  similar 
to  the  one  with  base  4,  but 
with  altitude  5,  etc.  Thus  we  obtain  x,  y,  z  all  on  the 


102 


GRAPHICAL    STATICS 


line  OM  and  following  one  another  head  to  tail.     Then 
OM=u  is  the  required  result. 

The  diagram  in  Fig.  124  can  appropriately  be  called 
a  Summation  Polygon  or  Diagram. 


EXERCISE  149.  Find  graphically: 


(fl)  ^ 


2-4+30. 


(b)  x- 


7-8+5-6+3-4+I-2 
5 


EXERCISE  150.  Find  x  graphically: 


(b)  x- 


-2)  (3) +  (3)  (-5) -(6)  (-7) 


EXERCISE  151.  A  horizontal  weightless  rod  10  feet  long  has 
weights  of  2,  3,  and  4  pounds  attached  at  £,  J,  and  }  of  its 
bngth.  Write  down  the  value  of  the  x  of  its  centroid  accord- 

2Wx 
ing  to  the  formula  x=—=-— ,  and  find  x  graphically. 

EXERCISE  152.  Same  as  Exercise  151,  with  additional 
weights  of  i  and  5  pounds  at  the  ends  of  the  rod. 

The  construction  just  studied  lends  itself  well  to  find- 
ing the  centroids  of  plates. 

Example.  —  Find    the  centroid  of   a 
quadrant  of  a  circle,  Fig.  125. 

Solution.  —  Consider  the  quadrant 
divided  into  sections  of  equal  width  as 
shown.  Let  the  plate  weigh  w  pounds 
per  square  foot  and  let  the  width  of  each 
section  be  a  feet.  Each  section  will  have 
a  mean  altitude,  as  shown  by  the  dotted 
lines;  denote  these  by  hi,  h2,  .  .  .  . 
Assume  each  section  to  be  a  trapezoid,  and  assume  their 


f. 


x  a  x  a 


FIG. 


I25 


GRAPHICAL    ARITHMETIC  103 

centroids  to  be  at  the  midpoints  of  their  medians.  Neither 
of  these  assumptions  is  strictly  true,  but  by  decreasing 
the  width  of  the  sections,  and  thus  increasing  their  num- 
ber, the  assumptions  approach  nearer  and  nearer  the 
truth.  It  follows  that 

the    area    of  any  section  is  ah, 
11    weight  "    "        "      "  wah, 

which  weight  is  assumed  to  act  at  the  midpoint  of  the 
median. 

Placing  the  y-axis  as  shown  in  Fig.  125  and  putting 
#=the  abscissa  of  the  centroid,  we  have 


ZW 


which  is  an  expression  precisely  suiting  our  graphical 
methods. 

The  graphical  construction  for  x  is  shown  in  Fig.  126. 
At  (a)  is  shown  the  quadrant  with  the  mean  altitudes 
(the  sections  are  not  shown,  as  these  are  unnecessary  for 
purposes  of  construction).  At  (b)  the  divisions  are  per- 
formed. Here,  instead  of  using  the  h's  as  indicated  in 
the  formula,  half  h's  are  used  throughout.  Why  does 
this  not  affect  the  result?  At  (c)  we  have  the  sum- 
mation polygon,  and  Iv,  the  required  abscissa,  is  here 


io4 


GRAPHICAL    STATICS 


found,     x  is  then  plotted  as  shown  in  (a);   the  centroid 
must  lie  on  the  dotted  line. 
Where  is  the  final  position  of  the  centroid? 


(b) 


FIG.  126 

EXERCISE  153.  Construct  a  parabola  whose  parameter  is  8 
and  find  the  centroid  of  a  plate  of  this  shape  between  the 
vertex  and  the  latus  rectum.  Divide  the  plate  into  four  sec- 
tions. 

EXERCISE  154.  Same  as  Ex.  153,  but  divide  the  plate  into  8 
sections  and  compare  the  result  with  that  of  Ex.  153. 


CHAPTER  V 

FORCES  ACTING  AT  A  SINGLE  POINT 
SECTION  XVII 

COMPONENTS.     RESULTANTS 

WE  already  know  that  the  diagonal  of  a  parallelogram 
constructed  upon  two  forces  as  sides,  correctly  represents 
the  resultant  if  the  tails  of  all  forces  are  at  the  one  ver- 
tex of  the  parallelogram.  Thus,  in  Fig.  127,  if  AB  and 
AC  represent  forces  acting  on  a  c, 
particle  at  A,  AD  represents  their 
resultant.  If  now  the  arrows 

representing  the  forces  A B  and  AC 

,     .  .,  FIG.  127 

be  drawn  to  a  scale,  i.e.,  each  unit 

of  their  length  being  accurately  made  to  represent  a  unit 
of  their  force,  and  the  parallelogram  be  accurately  drawn, 
then,  by  applying  the  same  scale  of  length  to  AD,  the 
number  of  units  of  length  in  AD  would  correctly  indicate 
the  number  of  units  of  force  in  the  resultant  of  AB  and 
AC.  This  is,  then,  a  graphical  method  of  obtaining  the 
resultant  of  two  forces  acting  at  a  point. 

In  many  constructions  it  is  inconvenient  to  complete 
the  parallelogram  as  above,  so  the  triangle  of  forces  is  used. 
This  is  illustrated  in  Fig.  128.  It  is  here  required  to 
find  the  resultant  of  the  forces  represented  by  AB  and 


106  GRAPHICAL    STATICS 

AC.  In  a  detached  diagram,  ab  is  drawn  ||  and  =  to 
AB  and  be  \\  and  =  to  AC,  and  the  triangle  then  com- 
pleted by  the  line  ac.  It  will  be  remembered  that  the 
force  ca  represents  the  force  producing  equilibrium  with 
AB  and  AC  and  thus  ac,  acting  in  the  opposite  direc- 


.  A  ^B  o 

FIG.  128 


tion  to  the  other  forces  about  the  triangle,  represents 
the  resultant  of  AB  and  AC  in  magnitude. 

This  resultant  is  now,  however,  not  in  its  proper  posi- 
tion. A  force  parallel  and  equal  to  ac  acting  at  A  is 
the  resultant  in  both  magnitude  and  position. 

Notice  the  difference  between  the  parallelogram  and 
the  triangle  of  forces,  the  first  gives  the  complete  result- 
ant in  position,  magnitude,  and  direction,  while  the  second 
gives  only  the  magnitude  and  direction. 

Instead  of  the  notation  employed  in  Fig.  128  it  will 
be  found  more  convenient  to  use  the  notation  of  Fig.  129. 


Here  the  forces  are  denoted  by  naming  the  letters  on 
each  side  of  the  forces;  thus,  the  horizontal  force  would 
be  ab.  In  the  triangle  of  forces  these  letters  are  placed 
at  the  ends  of  the  arrow  representing  the  force. 


FORCES    ACTING    AT   A   SINGLE    POINT  107 

EXERCISE  155.  Find  graphically  the  resultant  of 

(a)  3  lb.  and  5  lb.,  included  angle    90°; 

(b)  5   "      "7   "          "  "       60°; 

(c)  4  "      "9   "          "  "      120°; 

both  by  the  parallelogram  and  by  the  triangle  of  forces. 

Components 

To  find  the  components  of  a  force  P,  Fig.  130  (a),  in 
the  direction  of  the  lines  i  and  2,  proceed  as  indicated  in 
Fig.  130  (b).  Draw  p  \\  and  =  to  P,  and  through  its  ends 

-4 

^x 

(a)  ~N-^- -___  (&)  _ 


a 

FIG.  130 

draw  lines  ||  to  i  and  2  respectively;  then  ab  and  be  rep- 
resent the  required  components  of  P,  in  magnitude  and 
direction. 

EXERCISE  156.  Demonstrate  the  correctness  of  the  above 
construction  by  means  of  the  triangle  of  forces. 

EXERCISE  157.  Find  the  components  of  P=io  lb.  inclined 
at  45°  to  the  horizon  along  lines  inclined  at 

(a)  o°  and    90°; 

(b)  30°    "      60°; 

(c)  -30°    "    120°  to  the  horizon. 

EXERCISE  158.  Find  graphically  the  components  of  a  force 
whose  magnitude^  direction,  and  point  of  application  are 
20  lb.,  210°,  and  (2,  6)  respectively,  along  lines  inclined  at 
angles  of  45°  and  60°  to  the  axis  of  X, 


io8 


GRAPHICAL    STATICS 


Resultants 

If  it  is  desired  to  find  the  resultant  of  more  than  two 
forces  acting  upon  a  particle,  the  principle  of  the  parallel- 
ogram of  forces  may  still  be  applied,  provided  the  result- 
ant of  any  two  forces  be 
found,  and  this  resultant  be 
then  combined  with  another  of 
the  given  forces,  etc. 

This  is  illustrated  in  Fig. 
131,  where  the  given  forces 
are  OA,  OB,  OC.  The  result- 
ant of  OA  and  OB  is  OX,  and  the  resultant  cf  OX  and 
OC  is  OF.  Therefore  the  resultant  of  OA,  OB,  OC  is 
OF. 

As  the  number  of  forces  increases  it  is  evident  that  this 
construction  becomes  more  and  more  complicated. 

In  its  place  a  construction  based  upon  the  polygon  o) 
forces  is  used.  This  is  shown  in  Fig.  132.  The  forces 
whose  resultant  is  required  are  shown  in  Fig.  132  (a).  In 

d 


the  detached  diagram,  Fig.  132  (b),  an  open  polygon  is 
drawn  having  for  its  sides  lines  parallel  and  equal  to  the 
forces  ab,  be,  and  cd  arranged  tail  to  head.  The  arrow 
ad  required  to  close  the  polygon  and  taken  in  a  direction 
around  the  polygon  opposed  to  that  of  the  given  forces 


FORCES  ACTING    AT    A    SINGLE    POINT  IOQ 

represents  the  required  resultant  in  magnitude  and 
direction  but  not  in  position.  A  force  parallel  and  equal 
to  ad  acting  at  o  completely  represents  the  resultant. 

EXERCISE  159.  Find  the  resultant  of  the  forces  shown  in 
Fig.  133,  by  means  of  the  polygon  of  forces,  and  demonstrate 
the  dependence  of  this  construction  upon  that  of  the  triangle 
of  forces. 

EXERCISE  160.  Find  the  resultant  of  the  forces  shown  in 
Fig.  133  by  means  of  the  polygon  of  forces,  and  demonstrate 
the  correctness  of  the  construction  by 
resolving  each  force  into  vertical  and 
horizontal  components  and  showing  that 


Resultant  =V(2X)2+  (IY)2.. 

EXERCISE  161.  Assume  three  sets  of 
forces  of  3,  4,  and  5  forces  respectively, 
and  find  the  resultant  of  each  set. 

EXERCISE  162.    Six  men  pull  upon  six  "        FlG 
cords  knotted  together.    They  exert  forces 
of  50,  60,  40,  100,  80,  and  125  pounds  and  pull  towards  the 
N.,  N.  30°  E.,    E.  60°  S.,  W.,  NW.,  and  S.  30°  W.,  respect- 
ively.    Find  the  direction  in  which  the  knot  will  move. 

EXERCISE  163.  If  O  is  any  point  in  the  plane  of  the  tri- 
angle ABC,  and  D,  E,  F  are  the  midpoints  of  the  sides  of 
the  triangle,  show  that  the  system  of  forces  OA,  OB,  OC 
is  equivalent  to  the  system  OD,  OE,  OF. 

SECTION  XVIII 

CONDITIONS  FOR  EQUILIBRIUM 

For  the  equilibrium  of  forces  acting  on  a  particle  it  is 
evident  that  the  resultant  must  be  zero.  Therefore  from 
the  above  discussion  of  the  polygon  of  forces  it  follows 
that  if  the  forces  acting  upon  a  particle  are  known  to  pro- 
duce equilibrium,  the  polygon  formed  of  them  must  close, 


no 


GRAPHICAL    STATICS 


Example. — A  particle  weighing  5  pounds  is  supported 
upon  a  rough  inclined  plane  by  forces  of  3  and  2  pounds 
acting  horizontally  and  vertically  respectively.  Find  the 
normal  reaction  of  the  plane  and  the 
friction  force,  if  the  inclination  of  the 
plane  is  30°. 

Solution. — Fig.   134   illustrates  the 
problem.     To   solve   graphically    all 
forces  acting  on  the  particle  should  be 
shown,  as  in  Fig.  135.     As  the  reaction  of  the  plane,  de, 
and  the  friction  force,  ea,  are  unknown,  they  are  repre- 
sented by  their  lines  of  action  only. 


31bs. 


51bs. 


FIG.  135 


FIG.  136 


In  Fig.  136  the  polygon  of  forces  is  shown.  To  con- 
struct this  start  with  the  known  forces  and  then  close 
the  polygon  by  lines  parallel  to  the  lines  of  action  of  the 
unknown  forces. 

The  arrows  de  and  ea  represent  the  normal  reaction  of 
the  plane  and  the  friction  force  respectively.  If  measured 
with  the  same  scale  as  was  used  in  plotting  the  known 
forces,  their  magnitudes  are  directly  obtained.  The  total 
reaction  of  the  plane,  being  defined  as  the  sum  of  the 
normal  reaction  and  friction,  is  represented  by  da.  (Why  ?) 


FORCES   ACTING    AT   A    SINGLE    POINT 


III 


D       B 

FIG.  137 


In  the  following  exercises  diagrams  illustrating  the 
frames  should  first  be  drawn  to  scale  so  as  to  obtain  the 
relative  inclination  of  the  members. 

EXERCISE  164.  Fig.  137  shows  a  derrick,  ABC,  and  a  chain, 
DCE,  supporting  a  load    of    10    tons. 
Assume  AC  =  25  feet,  AB=g  feet,  BC 
=  20  feet,  and  D  the  midpoint  of  A  B. 

Find  graphically  the  stresses  in  AC 
and  BC  if  the  chain  is  fastened  at  C. 
(This  releases  DC  of  stress.) 

EXERCISE  165.  Find  stresses  in  AC 
and  BC,  Fig.  137,  if  the  chain  passes 
freely  over  a  pin  at  C.     (This  causes  a  stress  of   10  tons 
in  DC.) 

EXERCISE  166.  Find  the  stress  in  AB  and  BC  of  the  tri- 
angular frame,  Fig.  138,  if  2  tons 
are  suspended  from  B. 

EXERCISE  167.  What  will  be 
the  stress  in  AC,  Fig.  138,  if 
the  frame  is  loaded  as  in  Exercise 
166? 

EXERCISE  168.  If  in  Fig.  138  two  cables  inclined  to  the 
horizon  at  45°  and  90°  and  stretched  with  forces  of  2  and  5 
tons  respectively  be  attached  to  B,  find  the  stress  in  AB  and  BC. 

EXERCISE  169.  Find  stresses  in  AB  and  BC,  Fig.  139,  if 
the  dotted  line  represents   a  rope 
passing    without    friction    over  B 
and  fastened  at  E. 

EXERCISE  170.  If  a  kite  in  equi- 
librium in  the  air  makes  an  angle 
of  45°  with  a  horizontal  plane, 
and  if  the  pressure  of  the  air  on 
the  kite  is  equal  to  three  times 


20ft. 

FIG.  138 


FIG.  139 


the  weight  of  the  kite,  find  the  direction  of  the  string  at  its 
point  of  attachment  to  the  kite,  and  the  magnitude  of  the 
tension  in  the  string  in  terms  of  the  weight  of  the  kite. 


112 


GRAPHICAL    STATICS 


EXERCISE  171.  A  string  A  BCD  is  fastened  to  supports  at 
A  and  D  which  are  on  the  same  level.  Two  weights  of  10 
pounds  and  x  pounds  are  tied  to  the  string  at  B  and  C.  If 
AD  is  30  feet  and  BC  is  horizontal  and  AB  =  BC  =  CD=i2 
feet,  find  x  and  the  tensions  in  AB,  BC,  and  CD. 

When  considering  the  relation  between  forces  acting  on 
a  body  the  important  principle  concerning  the  equilibrium 
of  three  forces  stated  on  page  60  should  be  carefully 
remembered;  for  by  it  the  problem  can  sometimes  be 
reduced  to  the  case  considered  in  this  section. 

EXERCISE  172.  Find  the  reactions  at  the  points  of  support 
A  and  B  when  the  crane,  shown  in  Fig.  140,  is  loaded  at  C 
with  4000  pounds.  (The  support  at  A  consists  of  a  collar, 
and  at  B  of  a  footstep.) 

EXERCISE  173.  Make  the  rod  DC  (Fig.  140)  a  "free  body  " 
and  thus  find  the  stress  in  the  rod  EF. 


FIG.  141 

EXERCISE  174.  If  in  Fig.  141  the  frame  ABC  is  hinged  to 
the  wall  at  A  and  rests  against  the  wall  at  B,  find  the  support- 
ing forces  at  A  and  B. 


"U^VERS.TY  6f-  TORONTO 

'          r.vY,    £NGIN£«|* 

NT  OF   V*  IV'V   *• 

'^~l'    Alld     St 


CHAPTER  VI 


FORCES  ACTING  ON  A  RIGID  BODY 
SECTION  XIX 

RESULTANTS 

THE  finding  of  the  resultant  of  forces  acting  on  a  rigid 
body  is  next  to  be  considered.  Assume  the  forces  shown 
in  Fig.  142  and  let  their  resultant  be  required.  It  will 
be  remembered  (see  p.  43) 
that  the  point  of  applica- 
tion of  a  force  may  be 
placed  anywhere  upon  its 
line  of  action  and  thus 
the  forces  i  and  2  may 
be  applied  at  the  point 
of  intersection  of  their 
lines  of  action  and  the 
parallelogram  completed  to 
obtain  th  e  resultant  X.  X, 
considered  as  replacing  i 
and  2,  may  now  be  simi- 
larly combined  with  3,  and 
and  3,  obtained  in  both  magnitude  and  position.  This 
resultant,  F,  may  have  its  point  of  application  anywhere 
along  its  line  of  action. 

"3 


FIG.  142 
F,  the  resultant   of   i,  2. 


114  GRAPHICAL    STATICS 

This  use  of  the  parallelogram  o]  jorces  is  cumbersome 
when  a  larger  number  of  forces  is  to  be  dealt  with.  The 
triangle  or  polygon  of  forces  is  again,  as  in  Section  XVII, 
used  to  simplify  the  construction. 

In  Fig.  143  (a)  the  forces  are  shown,  and  in  Fig.  143  (b) 
the  forces  are  combined  to  obtain  the  resultant.  First 
ab  and  be  give  ac,  then  ac  and  cd  give  the  final  resultant 


al,  Fig.  143  (b),  in  magnitude  and  direction  but  not  in 
position. 

Notice  that  from  no  portion  of  the  work  already  com- 
pleted can  we  infer  at  what  point  of  the  body  this  result- 
ant should  act. 

To  find  the  position  of  the  resultant,  return  to  Fig. 
143  (a)  and  find  the  intersection  of  the  lines  of  action  ab 
and  be  at  O.  Through  this  point  we  know  that  their 
resultant  must  act;  therefore  through  O  draw  a  line 
parallel  to  ac  of  Fig.  143  (b).  This  partial  resultant  is 
now  combined  with  cd,  and  the  intersection  of  their 
lines  of  action  is  found  at  P.  Finally  through  this  point 
the  resultant  of  ac  and  cd  (or  of  ab,  be,  and  cd),  that  is 
the  force  ad,  must  pass.  The  problem  is  thus  com- 
pletely solved. 

EXERCISE  175.  Find  the  resultant  of  the  forces  shown  in 
Fig.  144 


FORCES    ACTING    ON   A    RIGID    BODY 


(a)  by  means  of  the  parallelogram  of  forces; 

(b)  by  means  of  the  triangle  of  forces. 

If  it  should  happen  that  the  given  forces  are  parallel 
or  even  nearly  so,  it  is  evicjent  that  the  method  for  find- 
ing their  resultant  outlined 
above  is  inapplicable,  as  the 
intersection  of  the  lines  of 
action  of  any  two  such  forces 
cannot  be  found  at  all,  or 
is  inconveniently  distant.  It 
is  therefore  necessary  to 
develop  some  modification 
of  the  preceding  method. 

Consider    the    forces   ab, 


be,  cd,  and  de,  shown  in  Fig. 

145.     Instead  of  finding  the 

resultant  of  the  given  forces 

directly,  introduce  into  the  problem  a  force  oa,  taken 

entirely  at  random  or  to  suit  convenience,  and  then  pro- 

ceed to  find  the  resultant  of  this  new  set  of  forces,  as 

already  explained  on  page  114. 

This  is  done  in  Figs.  145  and  146,  and  oe  is  found  to 
be  the  resultant  of  oa,  ab,  be,  cd,  and  de.  Thus  oe  equals 
the  sum  of  the  given  forces  plus  oa.  But  as  oa  was 
introduced  for  convenience  of  solution  only,  it  should 
now  be  removed,  i.e.,  subtracted  from  oe,  to  obtain  the 
sum  of  the  given  forces  or  the  required  resultant.  This 
is  done  by  drawing  the  line  ae\  for,  if  the  direction  of 
the  arrows  be  noted,  we  see  that 


oa-\-ae=oe', 


n6 


GRAPHICAL    STATICS 


This  is  equivalent  to  reversing  the  direction  of  the  force 
oa  and  adding  it  to  oe. 

Thus  a  force  parallel  and  equal  to  ae,  having  its  line 
of  action  passing  through  P,  the  intersection  of  the  lines 
of  action  of  oa  and  oe,  is  the  required  resultant. 

The  polygon  formed  of  the  forces  ab,  be,  cd,  de,  and 
ae,  Fig.  146,  is  called  the  polygon  oj  forces,  or  more  dis- 


10 


FIG.  145 


FIG.  146 


tinctively  the  magnitude  polygon.  It  depends  only  upon 
the  forces  irrespective  of  their  positions.  The  point  o  is 
called  the  pole,  and  the  lines  oa,  ob,  .  .  .  ,  oe  are  rays. 

The  polygon  formed  by  the  lines  of  action  of  the  forces 
oa,  ob,  oc,  od,  and  oe,  Fig.  145,  is  called  the  funicular 
polygon.  This  is  the  Latin  equivalent  of  string  polygon, 
and  it  is  so  named  because  it  gives  the  form  assumed  by 
a  weightless  string  fastened  at  the  points  M  and  N  and 
subjected  to  the  given  forces  ab,  be,  .  .  .  ,  de. 

In  applying  this  method  to  a  set  of  given  forces,  it 
will  be  found  convenient  to  first  letter  all  the  forces,  then 
draw  the  magnitude  polygon,  thus  determining  the  mag- 


FORCES    ACTING    ON    A    RIGID    BODY  117 

nitude  and  the  direction  of  the  resultant,  as  in  Fig.  146. 
Next,  instead  of  assuming  the  force  oa  as  in  the  above 
demonstration,  place  the  pole  in  any  convenient  position 
and  draw  the  rays.  Then  start  the  funicular  polygon  by 
drawing  the  line  of  action  of  oa  anywhere  in  the  diagram, 
showing  the  positions  of  the  given  forces,  parallel  to  the 
ray  oa.  Through  the  intersection  of  the  first  and  last 
sides  of  the  funicular  polygon  draw  the  resultant  parallel 
and  equal  to  the  arrow  representing  the  resultant  in  the 
magnitude  polygon. 

Notice  particularly  the  system  of  lettering  employed  and 
follow  it  closely  in  the  exercises. 

EXERCISE  176.  Determine  graphically  the  resultant  of  the 
following  forces:  (20  lb.,  45°>  o,  o),  (*5  lb->  9°°>  13.  °)>  (3°  lb-> 
60°,  7,  o),  and  (25  lb.,  315°,  30,  o).  Each  force  is  given  by 
its  magnitude,  the  direction  of  its  line  of  action  with  reference 
to  the  X-axis,  and  one  point  on  its  line  of  action. 

EXERCISE  177.  Find  the  resultant  of  (20  lb.,  105°,  5,  o), 
(25  lb.,  263°,  n,  o),  (30  lb.,  98°,  15,  o),  (10  lb.,  80°,  17,0), 
(15  lb.,  280°,  2,  o). 

(Note. — The  angles  in  this  exercise  can  be  conveniently 
plotted  by  the  use  of  a  table  of  natural  tangents.) 

EXERCISE  178.  Find  the  resultant  of  forces  of  10,  20,  30, 
40,  50  lb.  acting  vertically  upward,  with  successive  intervals 
between  their  lines  of  action  of  3,  2,  6,  and  4  feet. 

EXERCISE  179.  Same  as  Ex.  178,  but  with  10-  and  3o-lb. 
forces  acting  vertically  downward. 

SECTION  XX 

CONDITIONS  FOR   EQUILIBRIUM 

The  magnitude  polygon  shown  in  Fig.  146  is  said  to 
be  "open"  because,  in  addition  to  the  given  forces,  ab, 
.  .  .  ,  de,  an  extra  force,  ae,  the  resultant,  is  required  to 


n8 


GRAPHICAL    STATICS 


close  the  polygon.  If  the  given  forces  placed  tail  to 
head  do  of  themselves  form  a  " closed"  magnitude  poly- 
gon, no  closing  line  is  required  and  the  given  forces 
have  no  resultant. 

This,  however,  does  not  mean  that  the  body  on  which 
these  forces  act  is  in  equilibrium,  for  the  absence  of  a 
resultant  simply  precludes  translation. 

It  yet  remains  to  be  shown  that  no  couple  acts  upon 
the  body.  To  do  this  we  turn  to  the  funicular  polygon. 
From  Fig.  145  it  will  be  noted  that  the  funicular  poly- 
gon has  all  but  one  of  its  vertices  on  the  lines  of  action 
of  the  given  forces,  and  this  one  vertex  P  lies  on  the  line 
of  action  of  the  resultant.  The  polygon  is  said  to  be 
"open"  because  all  of  its  vertices  do  not  lie  on  the  lines 
of  action  of  the  given  forces.  If,  however,  the  lines  of 
action  of  ao  and  oe  should  coincide,  then  the  funicular 
polygon  would  be  "closed,"  i.e.,  have  each  of  its  ver- 
tices upon  one  of  the  lines  of  action  of  the  given  forces, 
and  the  forces  ao  and  oe  would  neutralize  each  other  and 
produce  equilibrium.  This  can  only  happen  if  the  mag- 
nitude polygon  is  also  closed.  Study  carefully  Fig.  147. 


aoreuZ 

FIG.  147 

It  is,  however,  possible  that  the  magnitude  polygon  be 
closed,  and  that  the  first  and  last  sides  of  the  funicular 


FORCES    ACTING    ON    A    RIGID    BODY 


119 


polygon  do  not  coincide  but  are  parallel.  Under  these 
conditions  the  funicular  polygon  is  open  and  a  couple, 
whose  forces  are  ao  and  oe,  results.  Study  carefully 
Fig.  148. 

Thus  it  is  seen  that  for  equilibrium  oj  translation  the 
graphical  requirement  is  a  closed  magnitude  polygon,  and 
for  equilibrium  o]  rotation  a  closed  funicular  polygon  is 


FIG.  148 

necessary.  These,  then,  are  the  graphical  conditions  of 
equilibrium. 

The  following  examples  illustrate  the  method  of  pro- 
cedure in  the  application  of  the  above  principles. 

Example. — Upon  a  uniform  beam,  AB,  10  feet  long, 
weighing  150  pounds,  a  force  of  100  pounds  acts  at  an 
angle  of  315°  at  a  point  6  feet  from  A  :  find  the  reactions 
of  the  supports  if  the  beam  is  horizontal,  and  its  end  A 
is  hinged  to  a  vertical  wall  while  the  beam  rests  upon 
a  smooth  knife-edge  one  foot  from  B. 

Solution. — Fig.  149  (a)  illustrates  the  problem.  Fig. 
149  (b)  shows  the  beam  as  a  "free  body."  There  is  an 


120 


GRAPHICAL    STATICS 


(6) 


P=? 


unknown  vertical  reaction  P  at   C,  and   a   reaction   Q, 
unknown  in  magnitude  and  direction,  at  A. 

Letter  the  forces,  known  and  unknown,  and  start  the 
magnitude  polygon,  Fig.  149  (c),  using  any  convenient 

scale.  Proceed  to  the  line 
of  action  of  cd,  the  point 
d  being  undetermined. 

Assume  a  pole,  o,  and 
draw  the  rays,  ao,  bo,  and 
co.  Now  start  the  funicular 
polygon,  Fig.  149  (b),  at  A, 
the  only  known  point  in  the 
line  of  action  of  Q.  This 
is  essential,  as  otherwise 
the  funicular  polygon  can- 
not be  closed.  Complete 
the  funicular  polygon,  clos- 
ing it  by  the  line  od,  and 
c  through  o,  Fig.  149  (c),  draw 

od  parallel  to  od,  Fig.  149 
(b),  and  its  intersection  with  cd  determines  the  point  d. 

Close  the  magnitude  polygon  by  drawing  da.  Then 
cd  =  P  =  i4o  pounds  is  the  vertical  reaction  at  C  and 
da=Q  =  no  pounds  is  the  reaction  at  A  in  both  direction 
and  magnitude. 

These  are  the  forces  which  represent  the  actions  of  the 
knife-edge  and  hinge  upon  the  beam.  What  forces  do 
the  wall  and  knife-edge  have  to  resist? 

Example. — The  weightless  bar,  Fig.  150  (a),  supported 
by  smooth  pegs  at  A  and  B  and  by  the  cord  CD,  is  in 
equilibrium.     Find  the  reactions  of  the  supports. 
Solution, — Fig.  150  (b)  shows  the  bar  as  a  "free  body." 


(O 


FORCES    ACTING    ON    A    RIGID    BODY 


121 


5  lib. 


200  Ib. 


Letter  the. forces  (known  ones  first),  and  start  the  mag- 
nitude polygon,  Fig.  150  (c).  Having  carried  the  magni- 
tude polygon  as  far  as  possible,  start  the  funicular  polygon 
at  E,  the  intersection  of  the  lines  of  action  of  the  two  last- 
named  unknown  forces; 
tliis,  again,  is  essential  for 
the  closing  of  the  funic- 
ular polygon. 

Close  first  the  funicu- 
lar polygon  and  then  the 
magnitude  .polygon  by 
drawing  de  and  ea  in  Fig. 
150  (c)  through  d  and  a 
parallel  to  the  corre- 
sponding lines  of  action 
in  Fig.  150  (b). 

The  reactions  are  found 
to  be  a/ =  730  Ib.,  de  = 
725  Ib.,  and  ea  =  200  Ib. 

The  application  of  the 
graphical  principles  of 
equilibrium  offers  no  diffi- 
culties with  the  exception 
of  the  two-  illustrated  in 


d 

f. 

c              rf            _ 

ix^ 

o 

—2-] 

yc 

c 

(»  .'I'      " 

b      b 

tod 


FIG.  150 


the  above  examples.      These  ^should  therefore  be  care- 
fully noted. 

Notice,  also,  as  a  check  upon  the  correctness  of  a  fu- 
nicular polygon,  that  any  two  of  its  adjacent  sides  must 
meet  upon  the  line  of  action  of  that  force  designated  by 
the  same  letters  as  the  sides  after  omitting  the  0's.  Thus 
the  sides  oa  and  ob  meet  on  the  line  of  action' of  the  force 
ab,  etc. 


122  GRAPHICAL    STATICS 

EXERCISE  180.  Assume  four  forces  and  find  a  fifth  wholly 
unknown  force  necessary  to  produce  equilibrium. 

EXERCISE  181.  Assume  four  non-parallel  forces  and  the 
lines  of  action  of  two  other  forces.  Find  the  magnitudes  of 
these  forces  for  equilibrium. 

Note. — This  system  of  forces  requires  the  lines  of  action  of 
all  forces  involved  to  pass  through  one  point.  This  may  be 
shown  by  replacing  the  known  forces  by  their  resultant  and 
noting  that  this  resultant  and  the  two  unknown  forces  can 
only  be  in  equilibrium  under  the  above  conditions.  (Why?) 

EXERCISE  182.  Same  as  Exercise  181,  but  all  forces  parallel. 

EXERCISE  183.  Assume  two  forces  and  the  line  of  action  of 
another.  Find  a  fourth  wholly  unknown  force  and  the  mag- 
nitude of  the  third  force  for  equilibrium. 

EXERCISE  184.  Assume  two  forces  and  the  lines  of  action 
of  three  other  forces.  Find  the  magnitudes  of  these  forces 
for  equilibrium. 


T 


V     5' 


10  ft.     ^f_  10Jlb.  50o!lb. 

1000 

3000 

1000 


FIGS.  151  TO  154 

EXERCISE  185.  Find  the  reactions  of  the  supports  of  tl.c 
beam  shown  in  Fig.  151. 

EXERCISE  186.  Find  the  reactions  of  the  supports  of  the 
beam  shown  in  Fig.  152. 

EXERCISE  187.  Find  the  reactions  of  the  abutments  of  the 
frame  shown  in  Fig.  153. 

EXERCISE  188.  Find  the  reactions  of  the  abutments  of  the 
frame  shown  in  Fig.  154.  The  end  A  rests  on  frictionless 
rollers,  and  B  is  hinged  to  the  foundations, 


CHAPTER  VII 

APPLICATIONS  TO  STRUCTURES 
SECTION  XXI 

STRESSES  IN  MEMBERS   OF   FRAMED   STRUCTURES 

UP  to  the  present  only  the  forces  acting  on  a  rigid 
body  have  been  considered.  These  forces  are  called  the 
applied  forces  or  external  forces.  The  external  forces  act- 
ing upon  a  body  cause  a  strained  condition  of  the  body 
due  to  the  interaction  of  the  various  parts  of  the  body 
in  withstanding  the  action  of  the  applied  forces.  This 
interaction  of  the  parts  of  the  body  allows  a  transmission 
of  forces  from  one  part  of  the  body  to  another.  The 
forces  so  transmitted  are  known  as  internal  forces. 

Structures  are  contrivances  for  resisting  forces.  They 
may  be  divided  into  two  types,  framed  and  non-framed. 
A  framed  structure,  or  frame,  is  one  composed  of  a  system 
of  straight  bars  fastened  together,  at  their  ends  only,  by 
pins  so  as  to  allow  a  hinge-like  motion.  Since  the  tri- 
angle is  the  only  geometric  figure  in  which  a  change  of 
shape  is  impossible  without  a  change  in  the  length  of  its 
sides,  the  triangle  is  necessarily  the  basis  of  the  arrange- 
ment of  the  bars  in  a  frame. 

Non-framed  structures  consist  of  one  continuous  mem- 

123 


124 


GRAPHICAL    STATICS 


her,  or  a  number  of  members  so  fastened  together  through- 
out their  lengths  as  to  make  one  solid  piece. 

Only  the  forces  acting  in  framed  structures  will  be 
considered. 

Consider  the  simple  frame  shown  in  Fig.  155.  A  load 
of  1000  pounds  acts  at  the  apex  M,  and  the  frame  rests 
upon  two  abutments  N  and  P. 

The  first  step  in  finding  the  forces  acting  on  and  trans- 
mitted by  the  frame  is  to  show  the  frame  as  a  "free 
body,"  Fig.  156.  In  this  figure,  in  order  to  readily  refer 


\ 


FIG.  156 

to  the  various  members  of  the  frame  and  the  applied 
forces,  designate  each  portion  into  which  the  plane  is 
divided  by  a  letter  as  shown.  The  load  of 
looo  pounds  would  then  be  referred  to  by 
naming  the  areas  on  each  side,  as  CD ;  similarly 
the  members  of  the  frame  are  EA,  AD,  AB,  etc. 
Find  now  the  reactions  of  the  abutments 
DE  and  EC  by  means  of  the  magnitude  and 
funicular  polygons  as  in  Figs.  157  and  156.  The  reac- 
tions are  found  in  Fig.  157  to  be  ce  and  ed.  Thus  a 
complete  knowledge  of  the  external  forces  is  obtained. 

To  find  the  internal  forces,  consider  the  pin  i  joining 
the  bars  AD  and  EA,     The  forces  acting  on  this  pin  are 


\ 


c 
FIG. 


APPLICATIONS    TO    STRUCTURES 


125 


FIG.  158 


shown  in  Fig.  158  (a).     DE  is  the  known  reaction,  and 

AD  and  EA  are  the  unknown  forces  transmitted  by  the 

members  of  the  same  name. 

These  forces  must  be  in  equi- 

librium,  therefore  the  triangle 

of    forces    must    close,    Fig. 

1  58  (b),  and  ae  and  da  are  the 

required  internal  forces  trans- 

mitted  by  AE  and  AD  respectively. 

Consider  now  pin  2.  The  forces  acting  on  it  arc 
shown  in  Fig.  159  (a).  Here,  in  addition  to  DC,  the  given 
load,  AD,  is  known.  For,  as  the  member  A  D  itself  is 
in  equilibrium  and  presses  upon  pin  i  in  the  direction 
da,  Fig.  158  (b),  it  must  press  with  an  equal  and  opposite 
force  on  pin  2. 

The  polygon  of  forces  for  pin  2  is  shown  in  Fig.  159  (b). 


FIG.  159 


c 

FIG.  i 60 


This  polygon  shows  that  the  member  AB  transmits  no 
force  and  is  therefore  useless  for  this  particular  loading 
of  the  frame. 

The  process  begun  above  may  be  continued  until  as 
many  force  polygons  as  there  are  pins  have  been  con- 
structed. Instead,  however,  it  is  much  shorter  to  com- 
bine all  these  polygons  into  one  diagram  based  upon  the 
magnitude  polygon,  Fig.  157,  as  shown  in  Fig.  160.  The 
reason  for  this  is  evident  if  we  consider  that  each  polygon 


126  GRAPHICAL    STATICS 

has  for  its  sides  one  or  more  sides  already  belonging  to 
preceding  polygons. 

In  order  to  facilitate  the  construction  of  the  polygons 
of  internal  forces,  the  names  of  all  the  forces  acting  at 
each  pin,  always  taken  in  one  direction  (clockwise)  and 
always  starting  with  known  forces,  are  set  down  thus: 

For  pin  i,  EDAE;  pin  3,  EABE; 

pin  2,  ADCBA]          pin  4,  CEBC. 

Then,  as  in  Fig.  160,  draw  lines  parallel  to  the  corre- 
sponding members  transmitting  the  forces,  through  the 
proper  points,  until  all  the  schemes  have  been  com- 
pleted. 

Consider  now  very  carefully  the  information  conveyed 
by  these  polygons  of  internal  forces  (Fig.  160).  If  we 
consider  the  action  of  the  member  AD  upon  pin  i  we 
need  the  scheme  EDAE.  Follow  this  in  Fig.  160  and 
note  that  DA  presses  pin  i  downward  and  to  the  left. 
For  equilibrium  it  is  necessary  for  pin  i  to  react  with  an 
equal  and  opposite  force,  pushing  member  AD  upward 
and  to  the  right.  Now  regard  pin  2;  here  the  scheme 
is  ADCBA.  This,  with  the  assistance  of  Fig.  160,  shows 
that  AD  pushes  pin  2  upward  and  to  the  right.  Thus 
pin  2  reacts  on  AD  by  pushing  it  downward  and  to  the 
lejt.  Thus  AD  is  pushed  upward  and  to  the  right  at  i, 
and  downward  and  to  the  left  at  2,  by  equal  forces. 
These  equal  and  opposite  forces  produce  in  AD  a  stress, 
and  in  this  case  the  stress  is  known  as  a  compression,  and 
its  magnitude  is  given  by  the  length  ad,  Fig.  160.  The 
member  AD  must  be  made  of  sufficient  strength  to  with- 
stand tiiis  compression. 


APPLICATIONS  to  STRUCTURES 


127 


1000  Ibs. 


500  Ibs.' 


EXERCISE  189.  Explain  the  stress  in  member  AE,  Fig.  156. 

EXERCISE     190.      Explain    the 
stress  in  member  BC,  Fig.  156. 

EXERCISE  191.  Find  the  stresses 
in  the  various  members  of  the 
frame  shown  in  Fig.  155  if  P  is 
rigidly  fastened  to  the  abutment 
and  N  rests  on  frictionless  rollers, 
and  the  load  of  1000  Ibs.  at  the  apex  is  inclined  at  45°  to  the 
horizon. 

EXERCISE    192.  Find    the  stresses  in  the  members  of  the 
frame  shown  in  Fig.  161. 


10  ft. 


10  ft. 


FIG.  161 


FIG.  163 


loft.      " 15ft. 

FIG.  162 

EXERCISE  193.  Same  as  Ex.  192  for  Fig.  162. 
EXERCISE  194.  Same  as  Ex.  192  for  Fig.  163. 

SECTION  XXII 

THE   FUNICULAR  POLYGON  FOR   PARALLEL  FORCES 
CONSIDERED   AS  A  MOMENT  DIAGRAM 

Fig.  164  shows  a  horizontal  bar  supported  at  the  ends 
and  supporting  the  weights  P  and  Q.  The  magnitude 
polygon  is  shown  at  the  right,  and  the  funicular  polygon 
directly  under  the  bar.  From  these  polygons  we  derive 
the  magnitudes  of  the  reactions  cd  and  da. 


128 


GRAPHICAL   STATICS 


As  this  bar  is  in  equilibrium  the  sum  of  the  moments 
of  all  the  forces  acting  on  the  bar  about  any  point,  A, 
must  be  zero.  Thus,  the  sum  of  the  moments  of  the 
forces  to  the  left  of  A  must  be  equal  and  opposite  in 
sign  to  the  sum  of  the  moments  of  the  forces  to  the  right 
of  A.  At  A,  then,  there  is  a  tendency  to  bend  the  bar 
by  rotating  the  left-hand  end  clockwise  and  the  right- 


FIG.  164 

hand  end  counter-clockwise  about  A.  The  measure  of 
this  tendency  to  bend  the  beam  at  A  is  called  the  bend- 
ing moment,  or  simply  the  moment,  at  A ,  and  it  is  equal  to 
the  sum  of  the  moments  of  the  forces,  either  to  the  left 
or  to  the  right  of  A ,  about  A . 
In  Fig.  164  this  moment  would  be 


To  obtain  M  graphically  we  must  remember  that  in 
graphics  division  must  always  precede  multiplication. 
From  Fig.  164  (b)  we  see  that  RI  =da  and  P  =  ab  are  both 
divided  by  D  (see  page  100).  It  only  remains  to  mul- 


APPLICATIONS   TO    STRUCTURES  1  29 

tiply  by  x  and  y  respectively.     This  is  done  in  Fig.  164  (a), 

7?  P 

where  u:*=jrX    and    rv  =  ~f)y  (see  page  101); 


or 

.'.  mD=-M. 

As  the  sign  is  immaterial,  depending  only  on  which 
side  of  A  we  consider  the  moment  as  acting,  we  see  that 

m-D  is  the  bending  moment  at  A. 

m  being  a  vertical  distance  bounded  by  the  funicular 
polygon,  we  see  that  the  funicular  polygon  can  be  con- 
sidered as  a  moment  diagram. 

EXERCISE  195.  Construct  a  diagram  similar  to  Fig.  164  and 
show  that  (a)  nD  is  the  bending  moment  at  B;  (b)  pD  is  the 
bending  moment  at  C. 

In  the  application  of  the  above  principle  care  must  be 
taken  to  measure  the  various  distances  in  the  proper  units. 
A  good  rule  to  follow  is  to  measure  the  forces  and  other 
vertical  distances  with  the  scale  of  force  (in  pounds)  and 
all  horizontal  distances  with  the  scale  of  space  (in  feet). 
Thus,  m,  p,  ab,  cd,  etc.  (Fig.  164)  should  be  measured 
in  pounds  and  x,  y,  D,  etc.  in  feet. 

EXERCISE  196.  Find  graphically  and  check  by  calculation 
the  bending  moments  at  B,  C,  Z>,  E,  and  F  in  the  following 
horizontal  beam:  The  beam,  AG,  is  30  feet  long,  AB=BC= 
etc.  =  5  feet;  abutments  are  at  A  andG;  loads  of  3000,  1000, 
2000  Ibs.  are  hung  at  B,  C,  and  E  respectively. 

EXERCISE  197.  A  horizontal  beam  AE,  20  feet  long,  is  di- 


130  GRAPHICAL    STATICS 

vided  into  four  equal  parts  by  B,  C,  and  D.  The  beam  is 
supported  at  A  and  B  and  loaded  at  C,  D,  and  E  with  1000, 
3000,  and  2000  Ibs.  respectively.  Find  graphically  the  bend- 
ing moments  at  B,  C,  D,  and  E. 

EXERCISE  198.  Check  the  results  of  Ex.  197  analytically. 

EXERCISE  199.  A  beam  similar  to  that  of  Ex.  197  is  sup- 
ported at  A  and  C  and  loaded  with  3000,  2000,  and  3000  Ibs. 
at  B,  D,  and  E  respectively.  Find  the  moments  at  B,  C, 
and£>. 

EXERCISE  200.  A  horizontal  beam  AF,  25  feet  long,  sup- 
ports loads  of  1000,  500,  and  300  pounds  at  one  end  and  at 
10  and  25  feet  from  this  end  respectively.  The  supports  are 
5  and  15  feet  from  this  same  end.  Find  graphically  the 
moments  at  5 -foot  intervals  along  the  beam. 

SECTION  XXIII 

GRAPHICAL  METHOD   FOR  FINDING  CENTROIDS 

To  find  the  centroid  of  a  lamina,  divide  the  lamina 
into  portions  the  position  of  whose  centroids  are  known, 
and  consider  the  weights  of  these  portions  to  act  at  their 
respective  centroids  in  any  convenient  direction.  By 
means  of  the  funicular  polygon  find  the  resultant  of  these 
weights.  The  centroid  must  He  somewhere  on  the  line 
of  action  of  this  resultant.  Now  assume  the  weights  to 
act  in  any  other  direction,  always  through  their  respect- 
ive centroids,  and  again  find  their  resultant.  The  cen- 
troid must  also  lie  upon  the  line  of  action  of  this  resultant. 
The  centroid  is  thus  located  at  the  intersection  of  the 
lines  of  action  of  these  resultants. 

This  is  illustrated  in  the  following 

Example. — Find  the  centroid  of  the  plate  shown  in 
Fig.  165. 


APPLICATIONS    TO    STRUCTURES  13! 

Divide  the  plate  into  rectangles.  The  weight  of  each 
rectangle  is  proportional  to  its  area;  thus  the  weights  of 
the  rectangles  can  be  represented  by  20X6,  20X4,  8X4 
respectively. 

Consider  first  the  weights  ab,  be,  and  dc  as  acting  ver- 
tically downward;  their  resultant  is  found  to  be  ad. 

Next  assume  the  weights  to  act  horizontally.     Repre- 


FIG.  165 

sent  them  by  ef,  )g,  and  gh\  their  resultant  is  now  eh. 
Therefore  the  centroid  of  the  plate  is  at  C,  the  intersec- 
tion of  the  lines  of  action  of  the  resultants. 

EXERCISE  201.  Find  graphically  the  centroid  of  the  plates 
shown  in  Fig.  69. 

EXERCISE  202.  Find  graphically  the  centroid  of  the  lamina 
described  in  Exercise  153. 


APPENDIX 


APPLICATION  OF  TWO-DIMENSIONAL  METHODS 
TO  FINDING  STRESSES  IN  THREE-DIMEN- 
SIONAL STRUCTURES 

IN  this  volume  only  two-dimensional  statics  has  been 
considered.  A  few  examples  will  illustrate  how  the  prin- 
ciples already  studied  may  be  applied  to  three-dimen- 
sional structures. 

Example. — Find  the  stresses  in  the  members  of  the 
structure  represented  pictorially  in  Fig.  166  (a).  Here  AD, 


FIG.  1 66 

BD,  and  CD  represent  three  rods  fastened  at  A,  B,  and 
C  to  a  vertical  wall  MN.  A  and  B  are  on  the  same 
level  and  8  feet  apart;  EC  is  perpendicular  to  AB  at  its 
midpoint.  The  rods  are  each  5  feet  long. 

133 


134  APPENDIX 

Solution. — Pass  a  plane  through  C,  D,  and  E  and  find 
the  stresses  in  the  member  CD,  and  in  an  imaginary  mem- 
ber ED,  by  considering  the  equilibrium  of  the  point  D 
under  the  action  of  the  forces  transmitted  by  these  mem- 
bers and  the  weight  of  100  pounds,  Fig.  166  (b). 

By  the  similarity  of  triangles,  we  have 

-  =  — ,      . '.  -R  =  7  5  pounds ; 
100     4' 

also  —  =  -,      .*.   5  =  125  pounds. 

100     4 

The  tension  in  CD  is  thus  found  to  be  5  =  125  pounds. 

Now  pass  a  plane  through  A,  B,  and  D.  This  plane 
contains  the  rods  AD  and  BD  and  the  imaginary  rod 
DE.  As  AD  and  BD  are  to  replace  ED,  a  force  equal 
and  opposite  to  R,  Fig.  166  (b),  together  with  the  forces 
transmitted  by  AD  and  BD}  must  be  in  equilibrium. 
These  forces  are  shown  in  their  true  relative  positions, 
together  with  their  triangle  of  forces,  in  Fig.  166  (c). 

By  comparing  Aoczw  with  AABD  we  can  show  that 

P=Q,  .'.  wy=yz  =  —.     As  Aocyz  is  similar  to   AEBD 
we  have 

P      S 
—  =— ,     or    P=62.5  pounds. 

/  o        o 


Thus  the  compressions  in  AD  and  BD  are  equal  each 
to  62.5  pounds. 

EXERCISE  203.  A  pair  of  " sheer-legs"  is  formed  of  t\to 
equal  spars  fastened  together  at  the  top  so  as  to  form  an 
inverted  V.  The  spars  are  inclined  at  60°  to  each  other,  and 


STRESSES    IN    THREE-DIMEXSIOXAL    STRUCTURES       135 


their  plane  is  inclined  at  60°  to  the  ground.  A  rope  attached 
to  the  top  of  the  sheers  and  inclined  at  30°  to  the  horizon  lies 
in  a  vertical  plane  bisecting  the  sheers  and  holds  them  in  posi- 
tion. Find  the  stresses  in  the  spars  and  in  the  rope  when  a 
weight  of  10  tons  is  lifted. 

EXERCISE  204.  A  pair  of  sheers,  such  as  described  in  Ex. 
203  but  of  the  following  dimensions,  supports  a  load  of  122 
tons.  The  legs  of  the  sheers  are  116  feet  long;  they  are  45 
feet  apart  at  the  bottom;  the  supporting  guy  is  146  feet  long, 
and  the  sheers  afford  a  horizontal  reach  of  35  feet.  Find  the 
stresses  in  the  legs. 

Example. — The  vertical  post  of  a  crane  is  10  feet  long. 
The  jib  is  30  feet  long  and  the  stay  is  24  feet  long.  There 


FIG.  167 


are  two  back-stays,  making  angles  of  45°  with  the  hori- 
zontal; these  lie  in  planes  due  south  and  due  east  of  the 
post.  A  weight  of  4000  pounds  is  sustained  by  the  crane. 
Find  the  forces  transmitted  by  the  jib-  and  back- stays 
when  the  jib  lies  to  the  northwest  of  the  post. 
Solution,— Fig.  167  (a)  illustrates  the  problem.  Consider 


136  APPENDIX 

the  equilibrium  of  the  forces  acting  at  C  and  lying  in  the 
plane  ABC.  If  their  triangle  offerees,  Fig.  167  (b),  is 
drawn  to  .scale,  we  obtain  the  forces  transmitted  by 
AC  and  BC  graphically.  Represent  these  by  5  and  R. 

Now  consider  the  point  A  in  equilibrium  under  the 
action  of  AC,  AB,  and  an  imaginary  stay  AD.  These 
forces  all  lie  in  the  plane  ACBD.  From  the  triangle 
shown  in  Fig.  167  (c)  find  the  forces  transmitted  by  AB 
and  AD,  let  these  be  Q  and  P. 

Then  consider  A  in  equilibrium  under  the  action  of 
ASj  AE,  and  a  force  equal  and  opposite  to  P,  Fig.  167  (c). 
These  forces  are  shown  in  their  true  relative  positions  in 
Fig.  167  (d).  From  this  figure  we  obtain  Y=X,  the 
stresses  in  the  stays  AS  and  AE. 

EXERCISE  205.  Calculate  the  stresses  found  graphically  in 
the  preceding  example. 

EXERCISE  206.  Find  the  stresses  in  the  structure  described 
in  the  preceding  example  when  the  jib  lies  to  the  north  of 
che  post. 

EXERCISE  207.  A  weight  of  100  pounds  is  sustained  by  a 
tripod  having  equal  legs  so  arranged  that  the  distance  between 
each  pair  of  feet  is  equal  to  the  legs.  Find  the  compression 
in  each  leg. 

EXERCISE  208.  Find  the  compression  in  each  leg  of  a  tri- 
pod the  feet  of  whose  legs  rest  at  the  vertices  of  an  equilateral 
triangle  whose  sides  are  V3  feet  long,  if  the  legs  are  5  feet 
long  and  the  tripod  sustains  a  weight  of  1000  pounds. 

EXERCISE  209.  A,  B,  and  C  are  the  vertices  of  an  isosceles 
triangle  drawn  upon  a  horizontal  ceiling.  AB,  the  base  of 
the  triangle,  is  6  feet  long;  the  altitude  CD  is  5  feet  long.  To 
A  and  B  two  strings,  each  5  feet  long,  are  attached;  at  C  a 
string  3  feet  long  is  fastened.  The  strings  are  joined  at  their 
lower  ends  and  support  a  weight  of  100  pounds.  Find  the 
tension  in  each  string, 


PROBLEMS  FOR  REVIEW 

210.  Two  weights  of  P  and  Q  pounds  are  attached  to  a  string 
21  inches  long  at  points  8  and  6  inches  respectively  from  the 
ends.     If  the  ends  of  the  string  are  fastened  to  two  points  on 
the  same  level  14  inches  apart,  and  the  central  portion  of  the 
string  is  horizontal  when  equilibrium  results,  find  the  ratio  of 
P  to  Q. 

211.  Draw  an  equilateral  triangle  ABC  with  the  base  AB 
horizontal  and  C  downward.     Let  a  weight  at  C  be  tied  by 
threads  AC  and  BC  to  the  fixed  points  A  and  B:  if  the  thread 
BC  is  cut,  by  how  much  does  the  tension  in  AC  increase? 

212.  A  load,  W,  of  2000  pounds  is  hung  from  a  pin,  P,  at 
which  pieces  AP  and  BP  meet  like  the  tie-rod  and  jib  of  a 
crane.     The  angles  WPB  and  WPA  are  respectively  30°  and 
60°.     Find  the  forces  transmitted  by  AP  and  BP,  and  state 
which  piece  acts  as  a  strut  and  which  as  a  tie. 

213.  Draw  an  equilateral  triangle  ABC.     Let  BC  repre- 
sent a  weightless  lever  acted  on  at  B  by  a  force  of  13  pounds, 
acting  from  A  to  B,  and  at  C  by  a  force  of  9  pounds,  acting 
from  A   to  C.     Find  graphically  the  pressure  on,  and  the 
position  of,  the  fulcrum. 

214.  An  incline,  the  ratio  of  the  height  to  the  base  being 
i  to  10,  supports  a  body  weighing  100  pounds.     If  the  coeffi- 
cient of  friction  is  .2,  what  force  inclined  at  30°  to  the  incline 
would  move  the  body  up  the  plane  ? 

215.  A  body  rests  upon  a  smooth  plane  inclined  at  35°  to 
the  horizon.     If  the  body  weighs  10  pounds,  find  the  tension 
in  the  supporting  string  when  the  string  is  inclined  to  the 
plane  at  an  angle  of  (a)  25°,  (b)  — 10°. 


138  PROBLEMS    FOR    REVIEW 

2 1 6.  A  dead-weight  safety-valve  is  4  inches  in  diameter. 
The   weight   of  the   valve   is   20  pounds.     What   additional 
weight  must  be  added  so  that  steam  should  blow  off  when 
the  pressure  reaches  80  pounds  per  square  inch? 

217.  A  square  lamina  is  divided  into  four  equal  squares  by 
lines  parallel  to  the  sides;  a  circle  is  inscribed  in  one  of  these 
squares,  and  the  portion  of  the  lamina  within  the  circle  is 
removed.     Find  the  centroid  of  the  remainder. 

218.  A  uniform  beam,  whose  length  is  4  feet  and  whose 
weight  is  20  pounds,  has  weights  of  4  and  8  pounds  suspended 
from  its  extremities.     Where  must  a  single  support  be  placed 
to  produce  equilibrium  ? 

219.  A,  B,  and  C  are  three  smooth  pegs  in  a  vertical  wall, 
A  being  the  highest.     AB  and  AC  make  angles  of  30°  and 
60°  respectively  with  the  vertical  through  A  on  opposite  sides. 
A  string,  carrying  two  weights  of  1 2  pounds  each,  passes  over 
the  pegs  and  the  weights  hang  freely.     Find  the  pressure  on 
each  peg. 

220.  A  sphere,  diameter  i   foot,  hangs  against  a  smooth 
vertical  wall  by  a  string  6  inches  long  fastened  to  its  surface 
and  to  the  wall;    find  the  tension  of  the  string  and  the  pres- 
sure of  the  sphere  against  the  wall. 

221.  A  uniform  wire  AD,  15  inches  long,  is  bent  upwards 
at  right  angles  4  inches  from  A  and  6  inches  from  D.     Prove 
that  if  it  be  suspended  from  A  it  will  rest  with  the  second  bend 
vertically  below  A. 

222.  A  step-ladder  has  the  form  of  the  letter  A.     The  semi- 
angle  at  the  vertex  is  6.     If  it  rests  on  a  smooth  horizontal 
plane,  and  its  legs  are  kept  from  slipping  by  a  cord  connecting 
them  together  half-way  up,  how  much  greater  does  the  ten- 
sion in  the  cord  become  when  a  weight  W  is  placed  on  top 
of  the  ladder? 

223.  The  post  BA  of  a  crane  is  10  feet  high;   the  jib  BC  is 
24  feet  long  and  is  movable  about  B.     The  tie  is  shortened 
so  as  to  drop  the  load  of  6000  pounds  at  a  point,  D,  20  feet 
from  &    Find  graphically  the  stresses  in  the  tie  and  jib, 


PROBLEMS    FOR    REVIEW  139 

224.  A  rod  of  length  b  is  supported  horizontally,  and  to  its 
extremities  are  attached  the  ends  of  a  string  of  length  s.     If 
a  heavy  ring  of  weight  W  is  slung  on  the  string,  find  the  com- 
pression in  the  rod. 

225.  Draw  a  square  A  BCD;  a  force  of  8  pounds  acts  from 
A  to  D,  and  two  forces  of  12  pounds  each  act  from  A  to  B 
and  from  C  to  D;  find  their  resultant. 

226.  A  beam  balances  about  the  midpoint  of  its  axis  when 
weights  of  20  and  40  pounds  are  suspended  one  from  each 
end,  and  it  balances  about  a  point  one-third  of  the  length 
from  one  end  when  the  weights  are  interchanged.     Find  the 
weight  of  the  beam  and  the  distance  of  its  centroid  from  one 
end. 

227.  A  round  table  is  supported  on   three  legs  A,  B,  and 
C.     AB  =  AC=$  feet,  BC=4  feet.     A  weight  of  100  pounds 
is  placed  at  P;    the  distances  of  P  from  AB  'and  AC  are  re- 
spectively J  and  i  foot.     What  is  the  compression  in  each 
leg? 

228.  A  sheer-leg  is  formed  by  two  sheer-poles,  BC  and  DC, 
each  25  feet   in   length   and   secured   to  a   base-plate  in  the 
ground  at  B  and  D.     The  wire  guy,  AC,  is  attached  to  the 
ground  at  a  point  A  which  is  60  feet  from  ED.     The  vertical 
from  the  top,  C,  of  the  poles  meets  the  ground  at  a  distance 
of  10  feet  from  the  center  of  BD,  which  is  15  feet  long.     Find 
the  stresses  in  the  guy  (and  the  compression  in  the  poles) 
when  a  weight  of  20  tons  is  suspended  from  C. 

229.  A  uniform  beam  12  feet  long  and  weighing  56  pounds 
rests  on  and  is  fastened  to  two  props  5  feet  apart,  one  of  which 
is  3  feet  from  one  end  of  the  beam.     A  load  of  35  pounds  is 
placed  (a)  at  the  end  farthest  from  a  prop,  (b)  at  the  middle 
of  the  beam,  (c)  at  the  end   nearest  a  prop.     Calculate  the 
pressure  on  each  prop  in  each  case. 

230.  A  crane,  whose  post,  tie-rod,  and  jib  measure  15,  20, 
and  30  feet  respectively,  supports  a  load  of  10  tons  suspended 
by  a  chain  passing  over  a  pulley  at  the  jib-head.     Find  the 
stresses  in  each  member  (i)  when   the   lifting-chain   passes 


140  PROBLEMS   FOR   REVIEW 

from  the  pulley  to  the  drum  parallel  to  the  jib,  (2)  when  the 
drum  is  placed  so  that  the  chain  passes  from  the  jib-head 
parallel  to  the  tie-rod. 

231.  In  a  pair  of  pincers  the  jaws  meet  one  inch  from  the 
pin  forming  the  joint.     If  the  handles  are  grasped  with  a 
force  of  30  pounds  on  each  handle  at  a  distance.  6  inches  from 
the  pin,  find  the  compression  exerted  on  an  object  held  be- 
tween the  jaws,  and  also  the  force  resisted  by  the  pin. 

232.  A  painter's  scaffold  20  feet  long  and  weighing  150 
pounds  is  supported  by  vertical  ropes  attached  2  feet  from 
each  end;   if  two  painters  weighing  125  and  175  pounds  are 
at  4  feet  and  9  feet  from  one  end  of  the  scaffold  respectively, 
and  pots  of  paint  weighing  30  pounds  are  at  6  feet  from  the 
same  end,  find  the  tensions  in  the  ropes. 

233.  A  uniform  bar  projects  6  inches  beyond  the  edge  of  a 
table,  and  when  2  ounces  is  placed  one  inch  from  the  project- 
ing end  the  bar  topples  over;   wrhen  it  is  pushed  out  so  as  to 
project  8  inches  beyond  the  edge,  one  ounce  at  the  end  makes 
it  topple  over.     Find  the  weight  of  the  bar  and  its  length. 

234.  In  a  common  steelyard  the  weight  of  the  beam  is  10 
pounds,  and  acts  at  a  distance  of  2  inches  from  the  fulcrum. 
Where  must  a  weight  of  4  pounds  be  applied  to  balance  it  ? 

235.  The  weight  of  a  window-sash  3  feet  wide  is  5  pounds; 
each  of  the  weights  acting  on  the  cords  is  2  pounds.     If  one 
cf  the  cords  be  broken,  find  at  what  distance  from  the  middle 
of  the  sash  the  hand  must  be  placed  to  raise  it  with  the  least 
effort.     What  pressure  must  the  hand  exert? 

236.  A  piece  of  lead  placed  in  one  pan,  A,  of  a  balance  is 
balanced  by  10  pounds  in  the  other  pan,  B.     When  the  same 
piece  of  lead  is  placed  in  the  pan  B  it  required  n  pounds  in 
the  pan  A  to  balance  it.     Find  the  ratio  of  the  lengths  of  the 
arms  of  the  balance. 

237.  Two  equal  uniform  spheres  of  weight  W  and  radius 
a  rest  in  a  smooth  spherical  cup  of  radius  r.     Find  the  pres- 
sure between  either  sphere  and  cup  and  the  pressure  between 
Uie  spheres. 


PROBLEMS    FOR   REVIEW  141 

238".  A  uniform  beam  weight  W  is  hinged  to  a  horizontal 
plane  and  rests  against  a  vertical  wall.  Find  the  reaction  of 
the  hinge  and  the  pressure  on  the  wall  if  the  inclination  of  the 
beam  is  a. 

239.  A  smooth  uniform  beam  rests  against  two  smooth  hori- 
zontal rods,  and  its  lower  end  rests  against  a  smooth  horizontal 
plane.     The  beam  is  2.1  feet  long,  and  the  rods  touch  it  at 
points  a  and  b  feet  from  its  lower  end.     If  the  inclination  of 
the  beam  is  a,  find  the  reactions  of  the  supports. 

240.  A  beam  rests  between  two  rough  horizontal  rods.     The 
beam  lies  in  a  vertical  plane.     Assume  all  necessary  data  and 
write  the  equations  for  equilibrium. 

241.  ABC  is  a  rigid  equilateral  triangle;    the  weight  is  not 
considered;  the  vertex  B  is  fastened  by  a  hinge  to  a  vertical 
wall,  while  the  vertex  C  rests  against  the  wall  under  B.     If  100 
pounds  is  hung  from  A ,  find  the  reactions  at  B  and  C  graphi- 
cally. 

242.  Three  forces  of  10,  15,  and  50  pounds,  making  angles 
of  30°,  90°,  and  —135°  with  the  horizon,  act  upon  a  particle. 
Find  the  resultant  force  acting  upon  the  particle.     In  what 
direction  wrill  the  particle  move  ? 

243.  A  uniform  beam  weighing  10  pounds  is  supported  at 
its  ends  by  two  props.     If  the  length  of  the  beam  is  5  feet, 
find  where  a  weight  of  30  pounds  must  be  attached  so  that 
the  pressures  on  the  props  may  be  15  and  25  pounds  respect- 
ively. 

244.  A  carriage- wheel,  whose  weight  is  W  and  whose  radius 
is  r,  rests  upon  a  level  road.     Find  the  least  horizontal  force 
applied  at  the  axle  necessary  to  draw  the  wheel  over  an  ob- 
stacle whose  height  is  h. 

245.  A  mass  whose  weight  is  750  pounds  rests  on  a  hori- 
zontal plane  and  is  pulled  by  a  force,  P,  inclined  at  15°  to 
the  horizon.     Find  the  value  of  P,  which  will  just  start  the 
mass  if  the  coefficient  of  friction  is  .62. 

246.  Find  the  total  resistance  of  the  plane  in  Ex.  245. 

247.  A  body  whose  weight  is  10  pounds  is  supported  on  a 


142  PROBLEMS    FOR  REVIEW 

smooth  inclined  plane  by  a  force  of  two  pounds  acting  along 
the  plane  and  a  horizontal  force  of  5  pounds.  Find  the  in- 
clination of  the  plane. 

248.  Two  equal  rafters  /  feet  long  support  a  weight,  W, 
at  their  upper  ends.     Find  the  stress  in  the  tie-rod  a  feet  long 
connecting  their  lower  ends. 

249.  A  davit  is  supported  by  a  foot-step  at  A  and  by  a 
collar  at  B  placed  6  feet  apart.     A  boat  weighing  2  tons  is 
supported  by  two  such  davits  and  is  about  to  be  lowered. 
Assuming  that  the  boat  hangs  5  feet  from  the  vertical  through 
the  foot-step  and  collar,  and  that  each  davit  supports  one- 
half  the  weight  of  the  boat,  determine  the  forces  at  A  and  B. 

250.  A  man,  sitting  upon  a  board  suspended  from  a  single 
movable  pulley,  pulls  downward  at  one  end  of  the  rope  which 
passes  under  the  movable  pulley  and  over  a  pulley  fixed  to 
a  beam  overhead,  the   other   end  of  the  rope  being  fixed  to 
the  same  beam.     If  the  man  weighs  180  pounds,  what  force 
must  he  exert  so  as  to  maintain  equilibrium  ? 

251.  Make  sketches  of  (a)  a  system  of  weightless  pulleys 
in  which  one  pound  balances  32  pounds,   (b)   a  system  of 
weightless  pulleys  in  which  one  pound  balances  15  pounds. 

252.  Given  four  weightless  pulleys,  three  movable  and  one 
fixed,  around  each  pulley  passes  a  separate  rope;  the  load  is 
a  man  weighing  160  pounds.     Find  the  pull  exerted  by  the 
man  on  the  free  end  of  the  last  rope  in  order  to  maintain  equi- 
librium. 

253.  A  rod  10  inches  long  can  turn  freely  about  one  of  its 
ends;   a  body  weighing  4  pounds  is  hung  at  a  point  3  inches 
from  this  end.     If  the  free  end  of  the  rod  is  supported  by  a 
string  inclined  to  it  at  an  angle  of  120°,  find  the  tension  in 
the  string  and  the  reaction  at  the  fixed  end  of  the  rod. 

254.  Find  the  height  of  a  cylinder  which  can  just  rest  on 
an  inclined  plane  the  angle  of  which  is  60°,  the  radius  of  the 
cylinder  being  r. 

255.  What  is  the  minimum  coefficient  of  friction  necessary 
to  prevent  the  sliding  of  the  cylinder  in  Ex.  254? 


SHORT-TITLE     CATALOGUE 

OP  THE 

PUBLICATIONS 

OP 

JOHN   WILEY   &    SONS, 

NEW  YORK, 
LONDON:   CHAPMAN  &  HALL,  LIMITED. 


ARRANGED  UNDER  SUBJECTS 


Descriptive  circulars  sent  on  application.  Books  marked  with  an  asterisk  (*)  are  sold 
at  net  prices  only,  a  double  asterisk  (**)  books  sold  under  the  rules  of  the  American 
Publishers'  Association  at  net  prices  subject  to  an  extra  charge  for  postage.  All  books 
are  bound  in  cloth  unless  otherwise  stated. 


AGRICULTURE. 

Armsby's  Manual  of  Cattle-feeding i2mo,  Si   75 

Principles  of  Animal  Nutrition 8vo,  4  oo 

Budd  and  Hansen's  American  Horticultural  Manual: 

Part  I.  Propagation,  Culture,  and  Improvement i2mo,  i  50 

Part  II.  Systematic  Pomology i2mo,  i  50 

Downing's  Fruits  and  Fruit-trees  of  America 8vo,  5  oo 

Elliott's  Engineering  for  Land  Drainage i2mo,  i  50 

Practical  Farm  Drainage i2mo,  i  oo 

Green's  Principles  of  American  Forestry i2mo,  i  50 

Grotenfelt's  Principles  of  Modern  Dairy  Practice.     (Woll.) i2mo,  2  oo 

Kemp's  Landscape  Gardening i2mo,  2  50 

Maynard's  Landscape  Gardening  as  Applied  to  Home  Decoration i2mo,  i   «;o 

Sanderson's  Insects  Injurious  to  Staple  Crops i2mo,  i  50 

Insects  Injurious  to  Garden  Crops.     (In  preparation.) 
Insects  Injuring  Fruits.     (In  preparation.) 

Stockbridge's  Rocks  and  Soils 8vo,  2  50 

WolPs  Handbook  for  Farmers  and  Dairymen i6mo,  i  50 

ARCHITECTURE. 

Baldwin's  Steam  Heating  for  Buildings i2mo,  2  50 

Berg's  Buildings  and  Structures  of  American  Railroads 4to,  5  oo 

Birkmire's  Planning  and  Construction  of  American  Theatres 8vo,  3  oo 

Architectural  Iron  and  SteeL 8vo,  3  50 

Compound  Riveted  Girders  as  Applied  in  Buildings 8vo,  2  oO 

Planning  and  Construction  of  High  Office  Buildings 8vo,  3  50 

Skeleton  Construction  in  Buildings 8vo,  3  oo 

Brigg's  Modern  Arrerican  School  Buildings .8vo,  4  oo 

Carpenter's  Heating  and  Ventilating  of  Buildings 8vo,  4  oo 

Freitag's  Architectural  Engineering 8vo,  3  50 

Fireproofing  of  Steel  Buildings 8vo,  2  50 

French  and  Ives's  Stereotomy 8vo,  2  50 

Gerhard's  Guide  to  Sanitary  House-inspection i6mo,  i  oo 

Theatre  Fires  and  Panics i2mo,  i  50 

Holly's  Carpenters'  and  Joiners'  Handbook i8mo,  75 

Johnson's  Statics  by  Algebraic  and  Graphic  Methods 8vo,  2  oo 

1 


Kidder's  Architects' and  Builders' Pocket-book.  Rewritten  Edition.   i6mo,mor.,  5  oo 

Merrill's  Stones  for  Building  and  Decoration 8vo,  5 

Non-metallic  Minerals:    Their  Occurrence  and  Uses 8vo,  4  oo 

Monckton's  Stair-building ' 4to,  4  oo 

Patton's  Practical  Treatise  on  Foundations 8vo,  5  oo 

Peabody's  Naval  Architecture Svo,  7  50 

Richey's  Handbook  for  Superintendents  of  Construction i6mo,  mor.,  4  oo 

Sabin's  Industrial  and  Artistic  Technology  of  Paints  and  Varnish 8vo,  3  oo 

Siebert  and  Biggin's  Modern  Stone-cutting  and  Masonry Svo,  i  50 

Snow's  Principal  Species  of  Wood Svo,  3  50 

Sondericker's  Graphic  Statics  with  Applications  to  Trusses,  Beams,  and  Arches. 

Svo,  2  oo 

Towne's  Locks  and  Builders'  Hardware iSmo,  morocco,  3  oo 

Wait's  Engineering  and  Architectural  Jurisprudence Svo,  6  oo 

Sheep,  6  50 

Law  of  Operations  Preliminary  to  Construction  in  Engineering  and  Archi- 
tecture  Svo,  5  co 

Sheep,  5  50 

Law  of  Contracts Svo,  3 

Wood's  Rustless  Coatings:   Corrosion  and  Electrolysis  of  Iron  and  Steel.  .Svo,  4 

Woodbury's  F're  Protection  of  Mills Svo,  2 

Worcester  and  Atkinson's  Small  Hospitals,  Establishment  and  Maintenance, 
Suggestions  for  Hospital  Architecture,  with  Plans  for  a  Small  Hospital. 

i2mo,  i   25 

The  World's  Columbian  Exposition  of  1893 Large  4to,  i 

ARMY  AND  NAVY. 

Bernadou's  Smokeless  Powder,  Nitro-cellulose,  and  the  Theory  of  the  Cellulose 

Molecule 1 2mo,     2  50 

*  Bruff 's  Text-book  Ordnance  and  Gunnery Svo,    6  oo 

Chase's  Screw  Propellers  and  Marine  Propulsion Svo,    3  oc 

Cloke's  Gunner's  Examiner.     (In  press.) 

Craig's  Azimuth 4*0,  3  50 

Crehore  and  Squier's  Polarizing  Photo-chronograph Svo,  3  oo 

Cronkhite's  Gunnery  for  Non-commissioned  Officers 241110,  morocco,  2  co 

*  Davis's  Elements  of  Law Svo,  2  50 

*  Treatise  on  the  Military  Law  of  United  States 8vo,     7  co 

Sheep,  7  5<> 

De  Brack's  Cavalry  Outposts  Duties.     (Carr.) 24mo,  morocco,  2  oo 

Dietz's  Soldier's  First  Aid  Handbook i6mo,  morocco,  i   25 

*  Dredge's  Modern  French  Artillery 4to,  half  morocco,  15  oo 

Durand's  Resistance  and  Propulsion  of  Ships 8vo,  5  co 

*  Dyer's  Handbook  of  Light  Artillery i2mo,  3  oo 

Eissler's  Modern  High  Explosives Svo,  4  oo 

*  Fiebeger's  Text-book  on  Field  Fortification Small  Svo,  2  oo 

Hamilton's  The  Gunner's  Catechism i8mo,  i  oo 

*  Hoff's  Elementary  Naval  Tactics Svo,  i  50 

Ingalls's  Handbook  of  Problems  in  Direct  Fire Svo,  4  oo 

*  Ballistic  Tables Svo,     i  50 

*  Lyons's  Treatise  on  Electromagnetic  Phenomena.   Vols.  I.  and  II. . Svo,  each,  6  oo 

*  Mahan's  Permanent  Fortifications.     (Mercur.) Svo,  half  morocco,  7  50 

Manual  for  Courts-martial i6mo,  morocco,  i  50 

*  Mercur's  Attack  of  Fortified  Places i2mo,  2  oo 

*  Elements  of  the  Art  of  War Svo,  4  oo 

Metcalf's  Cost  of  Manufactures — And  the  Administration  of  Workshops.  .Svo,  5  oo 

*  Ordnance  and  Gunnery.     2  vols i2mo,  5  oo 

Murray's  Infantry  Drill  Regulations iSmo,  paper,  10 

Nixon's  Adjutants'  Manual 24010,  i  oo 

Peabody's  Naval  Architecture Svo,  7  50 


*  Phelps's  Practical  Marine  Surveying .8vo,  2  50 

Powell's  Army  Officer's  Examiner i2mo,  4  oo 

Sharped  Art  of  Subsisting  Armies  in  War iSrno,  morocco,  i  50 

*  Walke's  Lectures  on  Explosives, 8vo,  4  oo 

*  Wheeler's  Siege  Operations  and  Military  Mining 8vo,  2  oo 

Winthrop's  Abridgment  of  Military  Law, i2mo,  2  50 

Woodhull's  Notes  on  Military  Hygiene i6mo,  i  50 

Young's  Simple  Elements  of  Navigation i6mo,  morocco,  i  oo 

Second  Edition,  Enlarged  and  Revised i6mo,  morocco,  2  oo> 

ASSAYING. 

Fletcher's  Practical  Instructions  in  Quantitative  Assaying  with  the  Blowpipe. 

1 2mo,  morocco,  i  50 

Yunnan's  Manual  of  Practical  Assaying 8vo,  3  oo 

Lodge's  Notes  on  Assaying  and  Metallurgical  Laboratory  Experiments.  .  .  .8vo,  3  oo 

Miller's  Manual  of  Assaying i2mo,  i  oo 

O'Driscoll's  Notes  on  the  Treatment  of  Gold  Ores 8vo,  2  oo 

Ricketts  and  Miller's  Notes  on  Assaying 8vo,  3  oo 

Ulke's  Modern  Electrolytic  Copper  Refining 8vo,  3  oo 

Wilson's  Cyanide  Processes i2mo,  i  50 

Chlorination  Process i2mo,  i  50 

ASTRONOMY. 

Comstock's  Field  Astronomy  for  Engineers 8vo,  2  50 

Craig's  Azimuth 4to,  3  50 

Doolittle's  Treatise  on  Practical  Astronomy 8vo,  4  oo 

Gore's  Elements  of  Geodesy 8vo,  2  50 

Hayford's  Text-book  of  Geodetic  Astronomy 8vo,  3  oo- 

Merriman's  Elements  of  Precise  Surveying  and  Geodesy 8vo,  2  50 

*  Michie  and  Harlow's  Practical  Astronomy 8vo,  3  oo 

*  White's  Elements  of  Theoretical  and  Descriptive  Astronomy i2mo,  2  oo 

BOTANY. 

Davenport's  Statistical  Methods,  with  Special  Reference  to  Biological  Variation. 

i6mo,  morocco,  i  25 

Thome'  and  Bennett's  Structural  and  Physiological  Botany i6mo,  2  25 

Westermaier's  Compendium  of  General  Botany.     (Schneider.) 8vo,  2  oo 

CHEMISTRY. 

Adriance's  Laboratory  Calculations  and  Specific  Gravity  Tables .  .i2mo,  i  25 

Allen's  Tables  for  Iron  Analysis 8vo,  3  oo 

Arnold's  Compendium  of  Chemistry.     (Mandel.) Small  8vo,  3  50 

Austen's  Notes  for  Chemical  Students i2mo,  i  50 

Bernadou's  Smokeless  Powder. — Nitro-cellulose,  and  Theory  of  the  Cellulose 

Molecule i2mo,  2  50 

Bolton's  Quantitative  Analysis 8vo,  i  50 

*  Browning's  Introduction  to  the  Rarer  Elements 8vo,  i  50 

Brush  and  Penfield's  Manual  of  Determinative  Mineralogy 8vo,  4  oo 

Classen's  Quantitative  Chemical  Analysis  by  Electrolysis.    (Boltwood. ).  .8vo,  3  oo 

Cohn's  Indicators  and  Test-papers i2mo,  2  oo 

Tests  and  Reagents 8vo,  3  oo 

Crafts's  Short  Course  in  Qualitative  Chemical  Analysis.   (Schaeffer. ).  .  .i2mo,  i  so> 
Dolezalek's  Theory  of  the  Lead  Accumulator   (Storage  Battery).        (Von 

Ende.) 1 2mo,  2  50- 

Drechsel's  Chemical  Reactions.     (Merrill.) I2mo,  i  25 

Duhem's  Thermodynamics  and  Chemistry.     (Burgess.) 8vo,  4  oo 

Eissler's  Modern  High  Explosives 8vo,  4  oo 

Eff rent's  Enzymes  and  their  Applications.     ( Fresco  tt.) 8vo,  3  oo- 

Erdmann's  Introduction  to  Chemical  Preparations.     (Dunlap.) i2mo,  i  aj> 

3 


Fletcher's  Practical  Instructions  in  Quantitative  Assay  irg  with  the  Bleu  pipe. 

12010,  morocco,  i   50 

Fowler's  Sewage  Works  Analyses iimo,  2  oo 

Fresenius's  Manual  of  Qualitative  Chemical  Analysis.     (Wells.) 8vo,  5  oo 

Manual  of  Qualitative  Chemical  Analysis.  Part  I.  Descriptive.  (Weils.)  8vo,  3  oo 
System   of    Instruction    in    Quantitative    Chemical    Araiysis.       (Cohn.) 

2  vols 8vo,  1 2  50 

Fuertes's  Water  and  Public  Health i2mo,  i  50 

Furman's  Manual  of  Practical  Assaying 8vo,  3  oo 

*  Getman's  Exercises  in  Physical  Chemistry i2mo,  2  oo 

Gill's  Gas  and  Fuel  Analysis  for  Engineers i2mo,  i   25 

Grotemeu's  Principles  of  Modern  Dairy  Practice.     (Woll.) i2mo,  2  oo 

Hammarsten's  Text-book  of  Physiological  Chemistry.     (Mandel.) Svo,  4  oo 

Helm's  Principles  of  Mathematical  Chemistry.     (Morgan.) i2mo,  i   50 

Bering's  Ready  Reference  Tables  (Conversion  Factors ) 1611:0,  rr.crocco,  2  50 

Hind's  Inorganic  Chemistry 8vo,  3  oo 

*  Laboratory  Manual  for  Students i2mo,  75 

Holleman's  Text-book  of  Inorganic  Chemistry.     (Cooper.) 8vo,  2  50 

Text-book  of  Organic  Chemistry.     (Walker  and  Mott.) 8vo,  2  50 

*  Laboratory  Manual  of  Organic  Chemistry.     (Walker.) i2mo,  i  oo 

Hopkins's  Oil-chemists'  Handbook 8vo,  3  oo 

Jackson's  Directions  for  Laboratory  Work  in  Physiological  Chen^&>ry.  .8vo,  i  25 

Keep's  Cast  Iron 8vo,  2  50 

Ladd's  Manual  of  Quantitative  Chemical  Analysis i2mo,  i  oo 

Landauer's  Spectrum  Analysis.     (Tingle.) 8vo,  3  oo 

*  Langworthy   and    Austen.         The   Occurrence   of  Aluminium   in   Vege  able 

Products,  Animal  Products,  and  Natural  Waters 8vo,  2  oo 

Lassar-Cohn's  Practical  Urinary  Analysis.  (Lorenz.) i2mo,  i  oo 

Application  of  Some  General  Reactions  to  Investigations  in  Organic 

Chemistry.  (Tingle.) i2mo,  i  oo 

Leach's  The  Inspection  and  Analysis  of  Food  with  Special  Reference  to  State 

Control. 8vo,  7  50 

Lob's  Electrolysis  and  Electrosynthesis  of  Organic  Compounds.  (Lorenz. ).i2iro,  i  co 

Lodge's  Notes  on  Assaying  and  Metallurgical  Laboratory  Experiments.  ..  .8vo,  3  co 

Lunge's  Techno-chemical  Analysis.  (Cohn.) i2mo,  i  oo 

Mandel's  Handbook  for  Bio-chemical  Laboratory i2mo,  i  50 

*  Martin's  Laboratory  Guide  to  Qualitative  Analysis  with  the  Blowpipe .    i2mo,  60 
Mason's  Water-supply.     (Considered  Principally  from  a  Sanitary  Standpoint.) 

3d  Edition,  Rewritten 8vo,  4  oo 

Examination  of  Water.     (Chemical  and  Bacteriological.) i2rro,  i  25 

Matthew's  The  Textile  Fibres Svo,  3  50 

Meyer's  Determination  of  Radicles  in  Carbon  Compounds.     (Tingle.).  .i2mo,  i  oo 

Miller's  Manual  of  Assaying i2mo,  i  oo 

Mixter's  Elementary  Text-book  of  Chemistry i2mo,  i  50 

Morgan's  Outline  of  Theory  of  Solution  and  its  Results i2ir_o,  i  oc 

Elements  of  Physical  Chemistry i2mo,  2  oo 

Morse's  Calculations  used  in  Cane-sugar  Factories i6mo,  morocco,  i  50 

Mulliken's  General  Method  for  the  Identification  of  Pure  Organic  Compounds. 

Vol.  I Large  Svo,  5  oo 

O'Brine's  Laboratory  Guide  in  Chemical  Analysis Svo,  2  oo 

O'Driscoll's  Notes  on  the  Treatment  of  Gold  Ores Svo,  2  oo 

Ostwald's  Conversations  on  Chemistry.     Part  One.     (Ramsey.) i2mo,  i  50 

Ostwald's  Conversations  on  Chemistry.     Part  Two.     (Turnbull.).     (In  Press.) 

*  Penfield's  Notes  on  Determinative  Mineralogy  and  Record  of  Mineral  Tests. 

Svo,  paper,  50 

Pictet's  The  Alkaloids  and  their  Chemical  Constitution.     (Biddle.) Svo,  5  oo 

Pinner's  Introduction  to  Organic  Chemistry.     (Austen.) i2mo,  i  50 

Poole's  Calorific  Power  of  Fuels Svo,  3  oo 

Prescott  and  Winslow's  Elements  of  Water  Bacteriology,  with  Special  Refer- 
ence to  Sanitary  Water  Analysis i2mo,  i  25 

4 


*  Reisig's  Guide  to  Piece-dyeing 8vo,  25  oo 

Richards  and  Woodman's  Air,  Water,  and  Food  from  a  Sanitary  Standpoint  8vo,  2  oo 

Richards's  Cost  of  Living  as  Modified  by  Sanitary  Science i2mo,  i  oo 

Cost  of  Food,  a  Study  in  Dietaries i2mo,  i  oo 

*  Richards  and  Williams's  The  Dietary  Computer 8vo,  i  50 

Ricketts  and  Russell's  Skeleton  Notes  upon  Inorganic   Chemistry.      (Part  I. 

Non-metallic  Elements.) 8vo,  morocco,  75 

Ricketts  and  Miller's  Notes  on  Assaying .8vo,  3  oo 

Rideal's  Sewage  and  the  Bacterial  Purificat  on  of  Sewage £vo,  3  50 

Disinfection  and  the  Preservation  of  Food 8vo,  4  oo 

Rigg's  Elementary  Manual  for  the  Chemical  Laboratory.  .  . 8vo,  i  23 

Rostoski's  Serum  Diagnosis.  (Bolduan.) 1200,  i  oo 

Ruddiman's  Incompatibilities  in  Prescriptions Svo,  2  oo 

Sabin's  Industrial  and  Artistic  Technology  of  Paints  and  Varnish £vo,  3  oo 

Salkowski's  Physiological  and  Pathological  Chemistry.  (Orndorff.) Svo,  2  50 

Schimpf's  Text-book  of  Volumetric  Analysis i2mo,  2  50 

Essentials  of  Volumetric  Analysis i2mo,  i  25 

Spencer's  Handbook  for  Chemists  of  Beet-sugar  Houses i6mo,  morocco,  3  oo 

Handbook  for  Sugar  Manufacturers  and  their  Chemists.  i6mo,  morocco,  2  oo 

Stockbridge's  Rocks  and  Soils Svo,  2  50 

*  Tillman's  Elementary  Lessons  in  Heat Svo,  i  50 

Descriptive  General  Chemistry Svo,  3  oo 

Treadwell's  Qualitative  Analysis.  (Hall.) Svo,  3  oo 

Quantitative  Analysis.  (Hall.) Svo,  4  oo 

lurneaure  and  Russell's  Public  Water-supplies Svo,  5  oo 

Van  Deventer's  Physical  Chemistry  for  Beginners.  (Boltwood.) i2mo,  i  50 

*  Walke's  Lectures  on  Explosives Svo,  4  oo 

Washington's  Manual  of  the  Chemical  Analysis  of  Rocks Svo,  2  oo 

Wassermann's  Immune  Sera :  Haemolysins,  Cytotoxins,  and  Precipitirs.    (Bol- 
duan.)   i2mo,  i  oo 

Well's  Laboratory  Guide  in  Qualitative  Chemical  Analysis.. Svo,  i  50 

Short  Course  in  inorganic  Qualitative  Chemical  Analysis  for  Engineering 

Students I2mo,  i   50 

Text-book  of  Chemical  Arithmetic.     (In  press.) 

Whipple's  Microscopy  of  Drinking-water Svo,  3  50 

Wilson's  Cyanide  Processes i2mo,  i  50 

Chlorination  Process i2mo,  i  50 

Wulling's    Elementary    Course    in  Inorganic,  Pharmaceutical,  and  Medical 

Chemistry i2mo,  2  oo 

CIVIL  ENGINEERING. 

BRIDGES    AND    ROOFS.       HYDRAULICS.       MATERIALS    OF    ENGINEERING. 
RAILWAY  ENGINEERING. 

Baker's  Engineers'  Surveying  Instruments i2mo,  3  oo 

Btxby's  Graphical  Computing  Table Paper  IQ£  X  24!  inches.  25 

**  Burr's  Ancient  and  Modern  Engineering  and  the  Isthmian  Canal.     (Postage, 

27  cents  additional.) Svo,  3  50 

Comstock's  Field  Astronomy  for  Engineers Svo,  2  50 

Davis's  Elevation  and  Stadia  Tables Svo,  i  oo 

Elliott's  Engineering  for  Land  Drainage i2mo,  i  50 

Practical  Farm  Drainage I2mo,  i  oo 

Fiebeger's  Treatise  on  Civil  Engineering.     (In  press.) 

Folwell's  Sewerage.     (Designing  and  Maintenance.) Svo,  3  oo 

Freitag's  Architectural  Engineering.     2d  Edition ,  Rewritten Svo,  3  50 

French  and  Ives's  Stereotomy Svo,  2  50 

Goodhue's  Municipal  Improvements i2mo,  i  75 

Goodrich's  Economic  Disposal  of  Towns'  Refuse Svo,  3  ?o 

Gore's  Elements  of  Geodesy Svo,  2  50 

Hayford's  Text-book  of  Geodetic  Astronorry Svo,  3  oo 

Bering's  Ready  Reference  Tables  (Conversion  Factors) i6mo,  morocco,  2  50 

5 


Howe's  Retaining  Walls  for  Earth i2mo,  i   23 

Johnson's  (J.  B.)  Theory  and  Practice  of  Surveying Small  8vo,  4  oo 

Johnson's  (L.  J.)  Statics  by  Algebraic  and  Graphic  Methods 8vo, 

Laplace's  Philosophical  Essay  on  Probabilities.     (Truscott  and  Emory.) .  i2mo, 
Mahan's  Treatise  on  Civil  Engineering.     (1873.)     (Wood.) 8vo, 

*  Descriptive  Geometry 8vo, 

Merriman's  Elements  of  Precise  Surveying  and  Geodesy 8vo, 

Elements  of  Sanitary  Engineering 8vo, 

Merriman  and  Brooks's  Handbook  for  Surveyors i6mo,  morocco, 

Nugent's  Plane  Surveying 8vo,  3  50 

Ogden's  Sewer  Design i2mo,  2  oo 

Patton's  Treatise  on  Civil  Engineering 8vo  half  leather,  7  50 

Reed's  Topographical  Drawing  and  Sketching 4to,  5  oo 

Rideal's  Sewage  and  the  Bacterial  Purification  of  Sewage 8vo,  3  50 

Siebert  and  Biggin's  Modern  Stone-cutting  and  Masonry 8vo,  i  50 

Smith's  Manual  of  Topographical  Drawing.     (McMillan.) 8vo,  2  50 

Sondericker's  Graphic  Statics,  with  Applications  to  Trusses,  Beams,  and  Arches. 

8vo,  2  oo 

Taylor  and  Thompson's  Treatise  on  Concrete,  Plain  and  Reinforced 8vo,  5  oo 

*  Trautwine's  Civil  Engineer's  Pocket-book i6mo,  morocco,  5  oo 

Wait's  Engineering  and  Architectural  Jurisprudence 8vo,  6  oo 

Sheep,  6  50 

Law  of  Operations  Preliminary  to  Construction  in  Engineering  and  Archi- 
tecture  8vo,  5  oo 

Sheep,  5  50 

Law  of  Contracts 8vo,  3  oo 

Warren's  Stereotomy — Problems  in  Stone-cutting 8vo,  2  50 

Webb's  Problems  in  the  Use  and  Adjustment  of  Engineering  Instruments. 

i6mo,  morocco,  i   25 

*  Wheeler's  Elementary  Course  of  Civil  Engineering 8vo,  4  oo 

Wilson's  Topographic  Surveying 8vo,  3  50 

BRIDGES  AND  ROOFS. 

Boiler's  Practical  Treatise  on  the  Construction  of  Iron  Highway  Bridges.  .8vo,  2  oo 

*  Thames  River  Bridge 410,  paper,  5  oo 

Burr's  Course  on  the  Stresses  in  Bridges  and  Roof  Trusses,  Arched  Ribs,  and 

Suspension  Bridges 8vo,  3  50 

Burr  and  Falk's  Influence  Lines  for  Bridge  and  Roof  Computations.  .  .  .8vo,  3  oo 

.Du  Bois's  Mechanics  of  Engineering.     Vol.  II Small  4to,  10  oo 

Tester's  Treatise  on  Wooden  Trestle  Bridges 4to,  5  oo 

Towler's  Ordinary  Foundations 8vo,  3  50 

Greene's  Roof  Trusses 8vo,  i   25 

Bridge  Trusses 8vo,  2  50 

Arches  in  Wood,  Iron,  and  Stone 8vo,  2  50 

Howe's  Treatise  on  Arches 8vo,  4  oo 

Design  of  Simple  Roof-trusses  in  Wood  and  Steel 8vo,  2  oo 

Johnson,  Bryan,  and  Turneaure's  Theory  and  Practice  in  the  Ccsiprirg  of 

Modern  Framed  Structures Small  4to,  10  oo 

Merriman  and  Jacoby's  Text-book  on  Roofs  and  Bridges: 

Part  I.     Stresses  in  Simple  Trusses 8vo,  2  50 

Part  II.     Graphic  Statics 8vo,  2  50 

Part  III.     Bridge  Design 8vo,  2  50 

Part  IV.     Higher  Structures 8vo,  2  50 

US. orison's  Memphis  Bridge 4to,  10  oo 

Waddell's  De  Pontibus,  a  Pocket-book  for  Bridge  Engineers.  .  i6mo,  morocco,  3  oo 

Specifications  for  Steel  Bridges i2mo,  i   25 

Wood's  Treatise  on  the  Theory  of  the  Construction  of  Bridges  and  Roofs .  .  8vo,  2  oo 
Wright's  Designing  of  Draw-spans: 

Part  I.     Plate-girder  Draws 8vo,  2  50 

Part  II.     Riveted-truss  and  Pin-connected  Long-span  Draws 8vo,  2  50 

Two  parts  in  one  volume 8vo,  3  50 

6 


HYDRAULICS. 

Bazin's  Experiments  upon  the  Contraction  of  the  Liquid  Vein  Issuing  from 

an  Orifice.     (Trautwine.) 8vo,  2  oo 

Bovey's  Treatise  on  Hydraulics 8vo,  5  oo 

Church's  Mechanics  of  Engineering 8vo,  6  oo 

Diagrams  of  Mean  Velocity  of  Water  in  Open  Channels payer,  i  50 

Coffin's  Graphical  Solution  of  Hydraulic  Problems i6mo,  morocco,  2  50 

Flather's  Dynamometers,  and  the  Measurement  of  Power izmo,  3  oo 

FolwelTs  Water-supply  Engineering 8vo,  4  oo 

Frizell's  Water-power 8vo,  5  oo 

Fuertes's  Water  and  Public  Health i2mo,  i  50 

Water-filtration  Works ramo,  2  50 

Ganguillet  and  Kutter's  General  Formula  for  the  Uniform  Flow  of  Water  in 

Rivers  and  Other  Channels.     (Hering  and  Trautwine.) 8vo  4  oo 

Hazen's  Filtration  of  Public  Water-supply 8vo,  3  oo 

Hazlehurst's  Towers  and  Tanks  for  Water- works 8vo,  2  50 

Herschel's  115  Experiments  on  the  Carrying  Capacity  of  Large,  Riveted,  Metal 

Conduits 8vo,  2  oo 

Mason's  Water-supply.     (Considered  Principally  from  a  Sanitary  Standpoint.) 

8vo,  4  oo 

Merriman's  Treatise  on  Hydraulics 8vo,  5  oo 

*  Michie's  Elements  of  Analytical  Mechanics 8vo,  4  oo 

Schuyler's   Reservoirs   for   Irrigation,   Water-power,   and    Domestic    Water- 
supply Liuse  8vo,  5  oo 

**  Thomas  and  Watt's  Improvement  of  Rivers.     (Post.,  440.  additional.)  4to,  6  oo 

Turneaure  and  Russell's  Public  Water-supplies ?vo,  5  oo 

Wegmann's  Design  and  Construction  of  Dams 4to,  5  oo 

Water-supply  of  the  City  of  New  York  from  1658  to  1895 4to,  10  oo 

Wilson's  Irrigation  Engineering .  .Small  8vo,  4  oo 

Wolff's  Windmill  as  a  Prime  Mover 8vo,  3  oo 

Wood's  Turbines 8vo,  2  50 

Elements  of  Analytical  Mechanics ,    8vo,  3  oo 

MATERIALS  OF  ENGINEERING. 

Baker's  Treatise  on  Masonry  Construction .  .8vo,  5  oo 

Roads  and  Pavements 3vo,  5  oo 

Black's  United  States  Public  Works ObJonji  4to  5  oo 

Bovey's  Strength  of  Materials  and  Theory  of  Structures Svc.  7  50 

Burr's  Elasticity  and  Resistance  of  the  Materials  of  Engineering 8vo,  7  50 

Byrne's  Highway  Construction 8vo,  5  oo 

Inspection  of  the  Materials  and  Workmanship  Employed  in  Construction. 

i6mo,  3  oo 

Church's  Mechanics  of  Engineering 8vo,  6  oo 

Du  Bois's  Mechanics  of  Engineering.     VoL  I Small  4to,  7  50 

Johnson's  Materials  of  Construction Large  8vo,  6  oo 

Fowler's  Ordinary  Foundations 8vo,  3  50 

Keep's  Cast  Iron 8vo,  2  50 

Lanza's  Applied  Mechanics 8vo,  7  50 

Marten's  Handbook  on  Testing  Materials.     (Henning.)     2  vols 8vo,  7  50 

Merrill's  Stones  for  Building  and  Decoration 8vo,  5  oo 

Merriman's  Text-book  on  the  Mechanics  of  Materials 8vo,  4  oo 

Strength  of  Materials i2mo,  i  oe 

Metcalf's  Steel.     A  Manual  for  Steel-users i2mo,  2  oo 

Patton's  Practical  Treatise  on  Foundations 8vo,  5  oo 

Richardson's  Modern  Asphalt  Pavements.     (In  press.) 

Richey's  Handbook  for  Superintendents  of  Construction i6mo,  mor.,  4  oo 

Rockwell's  Roads  and  Pavements  in  France i2mo,  i  25 


Sabin's  Industrial  and  Artistic  Technology  of  Paints  and  Varnish 8vo,  3  oo 

Smith's  Materials  of  Machines i2mo,  i  oo 

Snow's  Principal  Species  of  Wood 8vo,  3  50 

Spalding's  Hydraulic  Cement.  . i2mo,  2  oo 

Text-book  on  Roads  and  Pavements i2mo,  2  oo 

Taylor  and  Thompson's  Treatise  on  Concrete,  Plain  and  Reinforced 8vo,  5  oo 

Thurston's  Materials  of  Engineering.     3  Paris 8vo,  8  oo 

Part  I.     Non-metallic  Materials  of  Engineering  and  Metailurcy 8vo,  2  oo 

Part  II.     Iron  and  Steel 8vo,  3  50 

Part  III.     A  Treatise  on  Brasses,  Bronzes,  and  Other  Alloys  and  their 

Constituents 8vo,  2  50 

Thurston's  Text-book  of  the  Materials  of  Construction 8vo,  5  oo 

Tillson's  Street  Pavements  and  Paving  Materials 8vo,  4  oo 

WaddelFs  De  Pontibus.    (A  Pocket-book  for  Bridge  Engineers.).  .  i6mo,  mor.,  3  oo 

Specifications  for  Steel  Bridges i2mo,  i   25 

Wood's  (De  V.)  Treatise  on  the  Resistance  of  Materials,  and  an  Appendix  on 

the  Preservation  of  Timber 8vo,  2  oo 

Wood's  (De  V.)  Elements  of  Analytical  Mechanics 8vo,  3  oo 

Wood's  (M.  P.)  Rustless  Coatings:    Corrosion  and  Electrolysis  of  Iron  and 

Steel 8vo,  4  oo 

RAILWAY  ENGINEERING. 

Andrew's  Handbook  for  Street  Railway  Engineers 3x5  inches,  morocco,  i   25 

Berg's  Buildings  and  Structures  of  American  Railroads 4to,  5  oo 

Brook's  Handbook  of  Street  Railroad  Location i6mo,  morocco,  i  50 

Butt's  Civil  Engineer's  Field-book .  i6mo,  morocco,  2  50 

Crandall's  Transition  Curve i6mo,  morocco,  i  50 

Railway  and  Other  Earthwork  Tables .8vo,  i  50 

Dawson's  "Engineering"  and  Electric  Traction  Pocket-book.  .  i6mo,  morocco,  5  oo 

Dredge's  History  of  the  Pennsylvania  Railroad:    (1879) Paper,  5  oo 

*  Drinker's  Tunnelling,  Explosive  Compounds,  and  Rock  Drills. 4to,  half  mor.,  25  oo 

Fisher's  Table  of  Cubic  Yards Cardboard,  25 

Godwin's  Railroad  Engineers'  Field-book  and  Explorers'  Guide.  .  .  i6mo,  mor.,  2  50 

Howard's  Transition  Curve  Field-book i6mo,  morocco,  i   50 

Hudson's  Tables  for  Calculating  the  Cubic  Contents  of  Excavations  and  Em- 
bankments  8vo,  i   oo 

Molitor  and  Beard's  Manual  for  Resident  Engineers i6mo,  i  oo 

Nagle's  Field  Manual  for  Railroad  Engineers i6mo,  ncrocco,  3  oo 

Phiibrick's  Field  Manual  for  Engineers i6mo,  morocco,  3  oo 

Searles's  Field  Engineering i6mo,  morocco,  3  oo 

Railroad  Spiral i6mo,  morocco,  i  50 

Taylor's  Prismoidal  Formulae  and  Earthwork 8vo,  i  50 

*  Trautwine's  Method  of  Calculating  the  Cube  Contents  of  Excavations  and 

Embankments  by  the  Aid  of  Diagrams 8vo,  2  oo 

The  Field  Practice  of  Laying  Out  Circular  Curves  for  Railroads. 

i2mo,  morocco,  2  50 

Cross-section  Sheet Paper,  25 

Webb's  Railroad  Construction i6mo,  morocco,  5  oo 

Wellington's  Economic  Theory  of  the  Location  of  Railways.  ....'.  . Small  8vo,  5  oo 

DRAWING. 

Barr's  Kinematics  of  Machinery 8vo,  2  50 

*  Bartlett's  Mechanical  Drawing 8vo,  3  oo 

*  "                     "                    "        Abridged  Ed 8vo,  150 

Coolidge's  Manual  of  Drawing 8vo,  paper  i  oo 

Coolidge  and  Freeman's  Elements  cf  Gcr.or?!  Drafting  for  Mechanical  Engi- 
neers  ".'.' Oblong  4to,  2  50 

Durley's  Kinematics  of  Machines 8vo,  4  oo 

Emch's  Introduction  to  Projective  Geometry  and  its  Applications 8vo.  2  50 

8 


Hill's  Text-book  on  Shad&s  and  Shadows,  and  Perspective 8vo,  2  oo 

Jamison's  Elements  of  Mechanical  Drawing 8vo,  2  50 

Jones's  Machine  Design: 

Part  I.     Kinematics  of  Machinery 8vo,  i  50 

Part  El.     Form,  Strength,  and  Proportions  of  Parts 8vo,  3  oo 

MacCord's  Elements  of  Descriptive  Geometry 8vo,  3  oo 

Kinematics;   or,  Practical  Mechanism 8vo,  5  oo 

Mechanical  Drawing 4to,  4  oo 

Velocity  Diagrams 8vo,  i   50 

*  Mahan's  Descriptive  Geometry  and  Stone-cutting 8vo,  i   50 

Industrial  Drawing.     (Thompson.) 8vo,  3  50 

Moyer's  Descriptive  Geometry.     (In  press.) 

Reed's  Topographical  Drawing  and  Sketching 4to,  5  oo 

Reid's  Course  in  Mechanical  Drawing 8vo,  2  oo 

Text-book  of  Mechanical  Drawing  and  Elementary  Machine  Design. 8vo,  3  oo 

Robinson's  Principles  of  Mechanism 8vo,  3  oo 

Schwamb  and  Merrill's  Elements  of  Mechanism 8vo,  3  oo 

Smith's  Manual  of  Topographical  Drawing.     (McMillan.) 8vo,  50 

Warren's  Elements  of  Plane  and  Solid  Free-hand  Geometrical  Drawing.  i2mo,  oo 

Drafting  Instruments  and  Operations i2mo,  25 

Manual  of  Elementary  Projection  Drawing i2mo,  5* 

Manual  of  Elementary  Problems  in  the  Linear  Perspective  of  Form  and 

Shadow i2mo,  oo 

Plane  Problems  in  Elementary  Geometry i2mo,  25 

Primary  Geometry i2mo,  75 

Elements  of  Descriptive  Geometry,  Shadows,  and  Perspective 8vo,  3  50 

General  Problems  of  Shades  and  Shadows 8vo,  3  oo 

Elements  of  Machine  Construction  and  Drawing 8vo,  7  50 

Problems,  Theorems,  and  Examples  in  Descriptive  Geometry 8vo,  2  50 

Weisbach's  Kinematics  and  Power  of  Transmission.    (Hermann  and  Klein)8vo,  5  oo 

Whelpley's  Practical  Instruction  in  the  Art  of  Letter  Engraving i2mo,  2  oo 

Wilson's  (H.  M.)  Topographic  Surveying 8vo,  3  50 

Wilson's  (V.  T.)  Free-hand  Perspective 8vo,  2  50 

Wilson's  (V.  T.)  Free-hand  Lettering 8vo,  i  oo 

Woolf's  Elementary  Course  in  Descriptive  Geometry Large  8vo,  3  oo 


ELECTRICITY  AND   PHYSICS. 

Anthony  and  Brackett's  Text-book  of  Physics.     (Magie.) Small  8vo,  3  oo 

Anthony's  Lecture-notes  on  the  Theory  of  Electrical  Measurements.  .  .  .  i2mo,  i   oo 

Benjamin's  History  of  Electricity 8vo,  3  oo 

Voltaic  Cell 8vo,  3  oo 

Classen's  Quantitative  Chemical  Analysis  by  Electrolysis.     (Boltwood.).8vo,  3  oo 

Crehore  and  Squier's  Polarizing  Photo-chronograph 8vo,  3  oo 

Dawson's  "Engineering"  and  Electric  Traction  Pocket-book.  i6mo,  morocco,  5  oo 
Dolezalek's    Theory   of   the    Lead   Accumulator    (Storage    Battery).      (Von 

Ende.) iamo,  2  50 

Duhem's  Thermodynamics  and  Chemistry.     (Burgess.) 8vo,  4  oo 

Flather's  Dynamometers,  and  the  Measurement  of  Power I2mo,  3  oo 

Gilbert's  De  Magnete.     (Mottelay.) 8vo,  2  50 

Hanchett's  Alternating  Currents  Explained i2mo,  i  oo 

Bering's  Ready  Reference  Tables  (Conversion  Factors) i6mo,  morocco,  2  50 

Holman's  Precision  of  Measurements 8vo,  2  oo 

Telescopic   Mirror-scale  Method,  Adjustments,  and   Tests.  .  .  . Large  8vo,  75 

Kinzbrunner's  Testing  of  Continuous-Current  Machines 8vo,  2  oo 

Landauer's  Spectrum  Analysis.     (Tingle.) 8vo,  3  oo 

Le  Chatelien's  High-temperature  Measurements.  (Boudouard — Burgess.)  i2mo,  3  oo 

Lob's  Electrolysis  and  Electrosynthesis  of  Organic  Compounds.  (Lorenz.)  i2mo,  i  oo 


*  Lyons's  Treatise  on  Electromagnetic  Phenomena.   Vols.  I.  and  II.  8vo,  each,  6  oo 

*  Michie's  Elements  of  Wave  Motion  Relating  to  Sound  and  Light 8vo,  4  oo 

Niaudet's  Elementary  Treatise  on  Electric  Batteries.     (Fishback.) lamo,  2  50 

*  Rosenberg's  Electrical  Engineering.     (Haldane  Gee — Kinzbrunner.).  .  ,8vo,  i  50 

Ryan,  Norris,  and  Hoxie's  Electrical  Machinery.     Vol.  1 8vo,  2  50 

Thurston's  Stationary  Steam-engines 8vo,  2  50 

*  Tillman's  Elementary  Lessons  in  Heat 8vo,  i  50 

Tory  and  Pitcher's  Manual  of  Laboratory  Physics Small  8vo,  2  oo 

Ulke's  Modern  Electrolytic  Copper  Refining 8vo,  3  oo 

LAW. 

*  Davis's  Elements  of  Law 8vo,  2  50 

*  Treatise  on  the  Military  Law  of  United  States 8vo,  7  oo 

Sheep,  7  So 

Manual  for  Courts-martial i6mo,  morocco,  i   50 

Wait's  Engineering  and  Architectural  Jurisprudence 8vo,  6  oo 

Sheep,  6  50 

Law  of  Operations  Preliminary  to  Construction  in  Engineering  and  Archi- 
tecture  8vo,  5  oo 

Sheep,  5  50 

Law  of  Contracts 8vo,  3  oo 

Winthrop's  Abridgment  of  Military  Law I2mo,  2  50 

MANUFACTURES. 

Bernadou's  Smokeless  Powder— Nitro-cellulose  and  Theory  of  the  Cellulose 

Molecule i2mo,  2  50 

Bolland's  Iron  Founder I2mo,  2  50 

"  The  Iron  Founder,"  Supplement I2mo,  2  50 

Encyclopedia  of  Founding  and  Dictionary  of  Foundry  Terms  Used  in  the 

Practice  of  Moulding I2mo,  3  oo 

Eissler's  Modern  High  Explosives 8vo,  4  oo 

Effront's  Enzymes  and  their  Applications.     (Prescott.) 8vo,  3  oo 

Fitzgerald's  Boston  Machinist i2mo,  i  oo 

Ford's  Boiler  Making  for  Boiler  Makers i8mo,  i  oo 

Hopkin's  Oil-chemists'  Handbook 8vo,  3  oo 

Keep's  Cast  Iron 8vo,  2  50 

Leach's  The  Inspection  and  Analysis  of  Food  with  Special  Reference  to  State 

ControL Large  8vo,  7  50 

Matthews's  The  Textile  Fibres 8vo,  3  50 

Metcalf's  Steel.     A  Manual  for  Steel-users i2mo,  2  oo 

Metcalfe's  Cost  of  Manufactures — And  the  Administration  of  Workshops. 8vo,  5  oo 

Meyer's  Modern  Locomotive  Construction 4to,  10  oo 

Morse's  Calculations  used  in  Cane-sugar  Factories i6mo,  morocco,  i   50 

*  Reisig's  Guide  to  Piece-dyeing 8vo,  25  oo 

Sabin's  Industrial  and  Artistic  Technology  of  Paints  and  Varnish 8vo,  3  oo 

Smith's  Press-working  of  Metals 8vo,  3  oo 

Spalding's  Hydraulic  Cement i2mo,  2  oo 

Spencer's  Handbook  for  Chemists  of  Beet-sugar  Houses.     . .  .  i6mo,  morocco,  3  oo 

Handbook  for  Sugar  Manufacturers  and  their  Chemists    .  i6mo,  morocco,  2  oo 

Taylor  and  Thompson's  Treatise  on  Concrete,  Plain  and  Reinforced 8vo,  5  oo 

Thurston's  Manual  of  Steam-boilers,  their  Designs,  Construction  and  Opera- 
tion  8vo,  5  oo 

*  Walke's  Lectures  on  Explosives 8vo,  4  oo 

Ware's  Manufacture  of  Sugar.     (In  press.) 

West's  American  Foundry  Practice i2mo,  2  50 

Moulder's  Text-book i2mo,  2  50 

10 


Wolff's  Windmill  as  a  Prime  Mover 8vo,    3  oo 

Wood's  Rustless  Coatings:   Corrosion  and  Electrolysis  of  Iron  and  Steel.  .8vo,    4  oo 


MATHEMATICS. 

Baker's  Elliptic  Functions 8vo,  i  50 

*  Bass's  Elements  of  Differential  Calculus i2mo,  4  oo 

Briggs's  Elements  of  Plane  Analytic  Geometry .  .  121110,  oo 

.Compton's  Manual  of  Logarithmic  Computations iimo,  50 

Davis's  Introduction  to  the  Logic  of  Algebra 8vo,  50 

*  Dickson's  College  Algebra Large  i2mo,  50 

*  Introduction  to  the  Theory  of  Algebraic  Equations Large  i2mo,  25 

Emch's  Introduction  to  Projective  Geometry  and  its  Applications 8vo,  50 

Halsted's  Elements  of  Geometry 8vo,  75 

Elementary  Synthetic  Geometry 8vo,  50 

Rational  Geometry i2mo,  75 

*  Johnson's  (J.  B.)  Three-place  Logarithmic  Tables:    Vest-pocket  size. paper,  15 

100  copies  for  5  oo 

*  Mounted  on  heavy  cardboard,  8X  10  inches,  25 

10  copies  for  2  oo 

Johnson's  (W.  W.)  Elementary  Treatise  on  Differential  Calculus.  .Small  8vo,  3  oo 

Johnson's  (W.  W.)  Elementary  Treatise  on  the  Integral  Calculus. Small  8vo,  i   50 

Johnson's  (W.  W.)  Curve  Tracing  in  Cartesian  Co-ordinates i2mo,  i  oo 

Johnson's  (W.  W.)  Treatise  on  Ordinary  and  Partial  Differential  Equations. 

Small  8vo,  3  50 

Johnson's  (W.  W.)  Theory  of  Errors  and  the  Method  of  Least  Squares.  i2mo,  i  50 

*  Johnson's  (W.  W.)  Theoretical  Mechanics i2mo,  3  oo 

Laplace's  Philosophical  Essay  on  Probabilities.     (Truscott  and  Emory.).  i2mo,  2  oo 

*  Ludlow  and  Bass.     Elements  of  Trigonometry  and  Logarithmic  and  Other 

Tables 8vo,  3  oo 

Trigonometry  and  Tables  published  separately Each,  2  oo 

*  Ludlow's  Logarithmic  and  Trigonometric  Tables 8vo,  i  oo 

Maurer's  Technical  Mechanics • S» , ,  4  oo 

Merriman  and  Woodward's  Higher  Mathematics 8vo,  5  oo 

Merriman's  Method  of  Least  Squares 8vo,  2  oo 

Rice  and  Johnson's  Elementary  Treatise  on  the  Differential  Calculus. .  Sm.  8vo,  3  oo 

Differential  and  Integral  Calculus.     2  vols.  in  one Small  8vo,  2  50 

Wood's  Elements  of  Co-ordinate  Geometry 8vo,  2  oo 

Trigonometry:   Analytical,  Plane,  and  Spherical i2mo,  i  oo 


MECHANICAL  ENGINEERING. 

MATERIALS  OF  ENGINEERING,  STEAM-ENGINES  AND  BOILERS. 

Bacon's  Forge  Practice i2mo,  i  50 

Baldwin's  Steam  Heating  for  Buildings I2mo,  2  50 

Barr's  Kinematics  of  Machinery 8vo,  2  50 

*  Bartlett's  Mechanical  Drawing 8vo,  3  oo 

*  "  "  "        Abridged  Ed 8vo,     i  50 

Benjamin's  Wrinkles  and  Recipes i2mo,    2  oo 

Carpenter's  Experimental  Engineering 8vo,    6  oo 

Heating  and  Ventilating  Buildings 8vo,    4  oo 

Cary's  Smoke  Suppression  in  Plants  using  Bituminous  Coal.     (In  Prepara- 
tion.) 

Clerk's  Gas  and  Oil  Engine Small  8vo,    4  oo 

Coolidge's  Manual  of  Drawing 8vo,  paper,     i  oo 

Coolidge  and  Freeman's  Elements  of  General  Drafting  for  Mechanical  En- 
gineers  Oblong  4to,    2  50 

11 


Cromwell's  Treatise  on  Toothed  Gearing i2mo, 

Treatise  on  Belts  and  Pulleys i2mo, 

Durley's  Kinematics  of  Machines 8vo, 

Flather's  Dynamometers  and  the  Measurement  of  Power iimo, 

Rope  Driving i2mo, 

Gill's  Gas  and  Fuel  Analysis  for  Engineers i2mo, 

Hall's  Car  Lubrication i2mo, 

Bering's  Ready  Reference  Tables  (Conversion  Factors) i6mo,  morocco, 

Mutton's  The  Gas  Engine 8vo,  5  oo 

Jamison's  Mechanical  Drawing 8vo,  2  50 

Jones's  Machine  Design: 

Part  I.     Kinematics  of  Machinery 8vo,  i   50 

Part  II.     Form,  Strength,  and  Proportions  of  Parts 8vo,  3  oo 

Kent's  Mechanical  Engineers'  Pocket-book i6mo,  morocco,  5  oo 

Kerr's  Power  and  Power  Transmission 8vo,  2  oo 

Leonard's  Machine  Shop,  Tools,  and  Methods.     (In  press.) 

Lorenz's  Modern  Refrigerating  Machinery.     (Pope,  Haven,  and  Dean.)     (In  press.) 

MacCord's  Kinematics;   or,  Practical  Mechanism 8vo,  5  oo 

Mechanical  Drawing 4to,  4  oo 

Velocity  Diagrams 8vo,  i   50 

Mahan's  Industrial  Drawing.     (Thompson.) 8vo,  3  50 

Poole's  Calorific  Power  of  Fuels 8vo,  3  oo 

Reid's  Course  in  Mechanical  Drawing 8vo,  2  oo 

Text-book  of  Mechanical  Drawing  and  Elementary  Machine  Design. 8vo,  3  oo 

Richard's  Compressed  Air i2mo,  i   50 

Robinson's  Principles  of  Mechanism 8vo,  3  oo 

Schwamb  and  Merrill's  Elements  of  Mechanism 8vo,  3  oo 

Smith's  Press-working  of  Metals 8vo,  3  oo 

Thurston's   Treatise    on    Friction  and   Lost   Work   in    Machinery   and    Mill 

Work :  .  .    8vo,  3  oo 

Animal  as  a  Machine  and  Prime  Motor,  and  the  Laws  of  Energetics .  i2mo,  i   oo 

Warren's  Elements  of  Machine  Construction  and  Drawing 8vo,  7  50 

Weisbach's    Kinematics    and    the    Power    of    Transmission.     (Herrmann — 

Klein.) • 8vo,  5  oo 

Machinery  of  Transmission  and  Governors.     (Herrmann — Klein.).  .  8vo,  5  oo 

Wolff's  Windmill  as  a  Prime  Mover 8vo,  3  oo 

Wood's  Turbines .' 8vo,  2  50 


MATERIALS   OF    ENGINEERING. 

Bovey's  Strength  of  Materials  and  Theory  of  Structures 8vo,  7  So 

Burr's  Elasticity  and  Resistance  of  the  Materials  of  Engineering.     6th  Edition. 

Reset 8vo,  7  50 

Church's  Mechanics  of  Engineering 8vo,  6  oo 

Johnson's  Materials  of  Construction 8vo,  6  oo 

Keep's  Cast  Iron 8vo,  2  50 

Lanza's  Applied  Mechanics .  .8vo,  7  50 

Martens's  Handbook  on  Testing  Materials.     (Henning.) 8vo,  7  50 

Merriman's  Text-book  on  the  Mechanics  of  Materials 8vo,  4  oo 

Strength  of  Materials I2mo,  i   oo 

Metcalf's  Steel.     A  manual  for  Steel-users i2mo.  2  oo 

Sabin's  Industrial  and  Artistic  Technology  of  Paints  and  Varnish 8vo,  3  oo 

Smith's  Materials  of  Machines I2mo,  i  oo 

Thurston's  Materials  of  Engineering 3  vols.,  8vo,  8  oo 

Part  II.     Iron  and  Steel 8vo,  3  50 

Part  III.     A  Treatise  on  Brasses,  Bronzes,  and  Other  Alloys  and  their 

Constituents 8vo,  2  50 

Text-book  of  the  Materials  of  Construction 8vo,  5  oo 


Wood's  (De  V.)  Treatise  on  the  Resistance  of  Materials  a.,     -n  Appendix  on 

the  Preseivation  of  Timber 8vo,    2  oo 

Wood's  (De  V.)  Elements  of  Analytical  Mechanics 8vo,    3  oo 

Wood's  (M.  P.)  Rustless  Coatings:    Corrosion  and  Electrolysis  of  Iron  and 

Steel 8vo,    4  oo 


STEAM-ENGINES  AND  BOILERS. 

Berry's  Temperature-entropy  Diagram i2mo,  i  25 

Carnot's  Reflections  on  the  Motive  Power  of  Heat.     (Thurston.) i2mo,  i  50 

Dawson's  "Engineering"  and  Electric  Traction  Pocket-book.  .  .  .i6mo,  mor.,  5  oo 

Ford's  Boiler  Making  for  Boiler  Makers i8mo,  i  oo 

Goss's  Locomotive  Sparks 8vo,  2  oo 

Hemenway's  Indicator  Practice  and  Steam-engine  Economy i2mo,  2  oo 

Button's  Mechanical  Engineering  of  Power  Plants 8vo,  5  oo 

Heat  and  Heat-engines 8vo,  5  oo 

Kent's  Steam  boiler  Economy 8vo,  4  oo 

Kneass's  Practice  and  Theory  of  the  Injector 8vo,  i  50 

MacCord's  Slide-valves 8vo,  2  oo 

Meyer's  Modern  Locomotive  Construction 4to,  10  oo 

Peabody's  Manual  of  the  Steam-engine  Indicator i2mo.  i  50 

Tables  of  the  Properties  of  Saturated  Steam  and  Other  Vapors 8vo,  i  oo 

Thermodynamics  of  the  Steam-engine  and  Other  Heat-engines 8vo,  5  oo 

Valve-gears  for  Steam-engines 8vo,  2  50 

Peabody  and  Miller's  Steam-boilers 8vo,  4  oo 

Pray's  Twenty  Years  with  the  Indicator Large  8vo,  2  50 

Pupin's  Thermodynamics  of  Reversible  Cycles  in  Gases  and  Saturated  Vapors. 

(Osterberg. ) i2mo,  i  25 

Reagan's  Locomotives:   Simple   Compound,  and  Electric i2mo,  2  50 

Rontgen's  Principles  of  Thermodynamics.     (Du  Bois.) 8vo,  5  oo 

Sinclair's  Locomotive  Engine  Running  and  Management i2mo,  2  oo 

Smart's  Handbook  of  Engineering  Laboratory  Practice i2mo,  2  50 

Snow's  Steam-boiler  Practice 8vo,  3  oo 

Spangier's  Valve-gears 8vo,  2  50 

Notes  on  Thermodynamics i2mo,  i  oo 

Spangler,  Greene,  and  Marshall's  Elements  of  Steam-engineering 8vo,  3  oo 

Thurston's  Handy  Tables 8vo.  i  50 

Manual  of  the  Steam-engine 2  vols.,  8vo,  10  oo 

Part  I.     History,  Structure,  and  Theory 8vo,  6  oo 

Part  II.     Design,  Construction,  and  Operation 8vo,  6  oo 

Handbook  of  Engine  and  Boiler  Trials,  and  the  Use  of  the  Indicator  and 

the  Prony  Brake 8vo,  5  oo 

Stationary  Steam-engines. 8vo,  2  50 

Steam-boiler  Explosions  in  Theory  and  in  Practice    i2mo,  i  50 

Manual  of  Steam-boilers,  their  Designs,  Construction,  and  Cperaticn £vo,  5  oo 

Weisbach's  Heat;  Steam,  and  Steam-engines.     (Du  Bois.) 8vo,  5  oo 

Whitham's  Steam-engine  Design Svo,  5  oo 

Wilson's  Treatise  on  Steam-boilers.     (Flather.) i6mo,  2  50 

Wood's  Thermodynamics,  Heat  Motors,  and  Refrigerating  Machines.  .  .8vo,  4  oo 

MECHANICS  AND  MACHINERY. 

Barr's  Kinematics  of  Machinery 8vo,  2  50 

Bovey's  Strength  of  Materials  and  Theory  of  Structures Svo,  7  50 

Chase's  The  Art  of  Pattern-making I2mo,  2  50 

Church's  Mechanics  of  Engineering 8vo,  6  oo 

13 


Church's  Notes  and  Examples  in  Mechanics 8vo,  oo 

Compton's  First  Lessons  in  Metal-working i2mo,  50 

Compton  and  De  Groodt's  The  Speed  Lathe i2mo,  50 

Cromwell's  Treatise  on  Toothed  Gearing i2mo,  50 

Treatise  on  Belts  and  Pulleys i2mo,  50 

Dana's  Text-book  of  Elementary  Mechanics  for  Colleges  and  Schools.  .  i2mo,  50 

Dingey's  Machinery  Pattern  Making i2mo,  oo 

Dredge's  Record  of  the   Transportation   Exhibits   Building   of   the   World's 

Columbian  Exposition  of  1893 4to  half  morocco,  5  oo 

Du  Bois's  Elementary  Principles  of  Mechanics : 

Vol.      I.     Kinematics 8vo,  3  50 

Vol.    II.     Statics 8vo,  4  oo 

Vol.  III.     Kinetics 8vo,  3  50 

Mechanics  of  Engineering.     Vol.    I Small  4to,  7  50 

Vol.  II Small  4to,  10  oo 

Durley's  Kinematics  of  Machines 8vo,  4  oo 

Fitzgerald's  Boston  Machinist i6mo,  i  oo 

Flather's  Dynamometers,  and  the  Measurement  of  Power i2mo,  3  oo 

Rope  Driving i2mo,  2  oo 

Goss's  Locomotive  Sparks 8vo,  2  oo 

Hall's  Car  Lubrication i2mo,  i  oo 

Holly's  Art  of  Saw  Filing iSrao,  75 

James's  Kinematics  of  a  Point  and  the  Rational  Mechanics  of  a  Particle.     (In  press.) 

*  Johnson's  (W.  W.)  Theoretical  Mechanics 12010,  3  oo 

Johnson's  (L.  J.)  Statics  by  Graphic  and  Algebraic  Methods 8vo,  2  oo 

Jones's  Machine  Design:  • 

Part    I.     Kinematics  of  Machinery 8vo,  i  50 

Part  II.     Form,  Strength,  and  Proportions  of  Parts 8vo,  3  oo 

Kerr's  Power  and  Power  Transmission 8vo,  2  oo 

Lanza's  Applied  Mechanics 8vo,  7  50 

Leonard's  Machine  Shop,  Tools,  and  Methods.     (In  press.) 

Lorenz's  Modern  Refrigerating  Machinery.      (Pope,  Haven,  and  Dean.)      (In  press.) 

MacCord's  Kinematics;   or,  Practical  Mechanism. 8vo,  5  oo 

Velocity  Diagrams 8vo,  i  50 

Maurer's  Technical  Mechanics 8vo,  4  bo 

Merriman's  Text-book  on  the  Mechanics  of  Materials 8vo,  4  oo 

*  Elements  of  Mechanics 12010,  i  oo 

*  Michie's  Elements  of  Analytical  Mechanics 8vo,  4  oo 

Reagan's  Locomotives:   Simple,  Compound,  and  Electric i2mo,  2  50 

Reid's  Course  in  Mechanical  Drawing 8vo.  2  oo 

Text-book  of  Mechanical  Drawing  and  Elementary  Machine  Design. 8vo,  3  oo 

Richards's  Compressed  Air i2mo,  i  50 

Robinson's  Principles  of  Mechanism 8vo ,  3  oo 

Ryan,  Norris,  and  Hoxie's  Electrical  Machinery.     Vol.  1 8vo,  2  50 

Schwamb  and  Merrill's  Elements  of  Mechanism 8vo,  3  oo 

Sinclair's  Locomotive-engine  Running  and  Management i2tno,  2  oo 

Smith's  (O.)  Press-working  of  Metals 8vo,  3  oo 

Smith's  (A.  W.)  Materials  of  Machines i2mo,  i  oo 

Spangler,  Greene,  and  Marshall's  Elements  of  Steam-engineering 8vo,  3  oo 

Thurston's  Treatise  on  Friction  and  Lost  Y/brk   in    Machinery  and    Mill 

Work 8vor  3  oo 

Animal  as  a  Machine  and  Prime  Motor,  and  the  Laws  of  Energetics 

i2mo,  i  oo 

Warren's  Elements  of  Machine  Construction  and  Drawing 8vo,  7  50 

Weisbach's  Kinematics  and  Power  of  Transmission.    (Herrmann— Klein.  ).8vo,  5  oo 

Machinery  of  Transmission  and  Governors.      (Herrmann — Klein. ).8vo,  5  oo 

Wood's  Elements  of  Analytical  Mechanics 8vo,  3  oo 

Principles  of  Elementary  Mechanics i2mo,  i  25 

Turbines 8vo .  2  50 

The  World's  Columbian  Exposition  of  1893 4to,  i  oo 

14 


METALLURGY. 

Egleston's  Metallurgy  of  Silver,  Gold,  and  Mercury: 

VoL    L     Silver 8vo,  750 

VoL  II.     Gold  and  Mercury 8vo,  7  50 

**  Iles's  Lead-smelting.     (Postage  9  cents  additional.) 12010,  2  50 

Keep's  Cast  Iron 8vo,  2  50 

Kunhardt's  Practice  of  Ore  Dressing  in  Europe .8vo,  i  gc 

Le  Chatelier's  High-temperature  Measurements.  (Boudouard — Burgess.  )i2mo,  3  oo 

Metcalf's  SteeL     A  Manual  for  Steel-user&     i2mo,  2  oo 

Smith's  Materials  of  Machines i2mo,  i  oo 

Thurston's  Materials  of  Engineering.     In  Three  Parts 8vo,  8  oo 

Part    II.     Iron  and  SteeL 8vo.  3  50 

Part  TTT.     A  Treatise  on  Brasses,  Bronzes,  and  Other  Alloys  and  their 

Constituents 8vo,  2  50 

Ulke's  Modern  Electrolytic  Copper  Refining 8vo,  3  oo 

MINERALOGY. 

Barringer's  Description  of  Minerals  of  Commercial  Value.    Oblong,  morocco,  2  50 

Boyd's  Resources  of  Southwest  Virginia 8vo,  3  oo 

Map  of  Southwest  Virignia Pocket-book  form.  2  oo 

Brush's  Manual  of  Determinative  Mineralogy.     (Penfield.) 8vo,  4  oo 

Chester's  Catalogue  of  Minerals 8vo,  paper,  i  oo 

Cloth,  i  25 

Dictionary  of  the  Names  of  Minerals 8vo,  3  50 

Dana's  System  of  Mineralogy Large  8vo,  half  leather,  12  50 

First  Appendix  to  Dana's  New  "  System  of  Mineralogy." Large  8vo,  i  oo 

Text-book  of  Mineralogy 8vo,  4  oo 

Minerals  and  How  to  Study  Them I2mo,  i  50 

Catalogue  of  American  Localities  of  Minerals Large  8vo,  i  oo 

Manual  of  Mineralogy  and  Petrography i2mo  2  oo 

Douglas's  Untechnical  Addresses  on  Technical  Subjects i2mo,  i  oo 

Eakle's  Mineral  Tables 8vo,  i  25 

Egleston's  Catalogue  of  Minerals  and  Synonyms 8vo,  2  50 

Hussak's  The  Determination  of  Rock-forming  Minerals.    ( Smith.). Small  8vo,  2  oo 

Merrill's  Non-metallic  Minerals:   Their  Occurrence  and  Uses 8vo,  4  oo 

*  Penfield's  Notes  on  Determinative  Mineralogy  and  Record  of  Mineral  Tests. 

8vo. paper,  o  50 
Rosenbusch's   Microscopical   Physiography   ot   the   Rock-maki«g  Minerals 

(Iddings.) 8vo.  5  oo 

*  Tollman's  Text-book  of  Important  Minerals  and  Rocks ...    .8vo.  2  oo 

Williams's  Manual  of  Lithology 8vo,  3  oo 

MINING. 

Beard's  Ventilation  of  Mines I2mo,  2  50 

Boyd's  Resources  of  Southwest  Virginia 8vo,  3  oo 

Map  of  Southwest  Virginia Pocket  book  form,  2  oo 

Douglas's  Untechnical  Addresses  on  Technical  Subjects i2mo.  i  oo 

*  Drinker's  Tunneling,  Explosive  Compounds,  and  Rock  Drills     4to.hf.  mor. .  25  oo 

Eissler's  Modern  High  Explosives 8vo  4  oo 

Fowler's  Sewage  Works  Analyses 12010  2  oo 

Goodyear's  Coal-mines  of  the  Western  Coast  of  the  United  States.      .    .  i2mo.  2  50 

Ihlseng's  Manual  of  Mining 8vo.  5  oo 

**  Iles's  Lead-smelting.     (Postage  oc.  additional.) 12010.  2  50 

Kunhardt's  Practice  of  Ore  Dressing  in  Europe 8vo,  i  50 

O'Driscoll's  Notes  on  the  Treatment  of  Gold  Ores 8vo.  2  oo 

*  Walke's  Lectures  on  Explosives 8vo.  4  oo 

Wilson's  Cyanide  Processes i2mo,  i  50 

Chlorination  Process I2mo,  i  50 

15 


Wilson's  Hydraulic  and  Placer  Mining i2mo,     2  oo 

Treatise  on  Practical  and  Theoretical  Mine  Ventilation t2mo.     i  25 

SANITARY  SCIENCE. 

FolwelPs  Sewerage.     (Designing,  Construction,  and  Maintenance.) 8vo,  3  oo 

•   Water-supply  Engineering 8vo,  4  oo 

Fuertes's  Water  and  Public  Health i2mo,  i  50 

Water-filtration  Works i2mo,  2  50 

Gerhard's  Guide  to  Sanitary  House-inspection i6mo,  i  oo 

Goodrich's  Economic  Disposal  of  Town's  Refuse Demy  8vo,  3  50 

Hazen's  Filtration  of  Public  Water-supplies 8vo,  3  oo 

Leach's  The  Inspection  and  Analysis  of  Food  with  Special  Reference  to  State 

Control 8vo,  7  50 

Mason's  Water-supply.  (Considered  principally  from  a  Sanitary  Standpoint)  8vo,  4  oo 

Examination  of  Water.     (Chemical  and  Bacteriological.) i2mo,  i   25 

Merriman's  Elements  of  Sanitary  Engineering 8vo,  2  oo 

Ogden's  Sewer  Design i2mo,  2  oo 

Prescott  and  Winslow's  Elements  of  Water  Bacteriology,  with  Special  Refer- 
ence to  Sanitary  Water  Analysis I2mo, 

*  Price's  Handbook  on  Sanitation I2mo, 

Richards's  Cost  of  Food.     A  Study  in  Dietaries i2mo, 

Cost  of  Living  as  Modified  by  Sanitary  Science i2mp, 

Richards  and  Woodman's  Air,  Water,  and  Food  from  a  Sanitary  Stand- 
point  8vo, 

*  Richards  and  Williams's  The  Dietary  Computer 8vo, 


25 
So 
oo 

00 

oo 

50 

Rideal's  Sewage  and  Bacterial  Purification  of  Sewage 8vo,  3  50 

Turneaure  and  Russell's  Public  Water-supplies 8vo,  5  oo 

Von  Behring's  Suppression  of  Tuberculosis.     (Bolduan.) i2mo,  i  oo 

Whipple's  Microscopy  of  Drinking-water 8vo,  3  50 

Woodhull's  Notes  on  Military  Hygiene i6mo,  i  50 

MISCELLANEOUS. 

De  Fursac's  Manual  of  Psychiatry.     (Rosanoff  and  Collins.).  .  .  .Large  i2mo,  2  50 
Emmons's  Geological  Guide-book  of  the  Rocky  Mountain  Excursion  of  the 

International  Congress  of  Geologists Large  8vo,  i  50 

Ferrel's  Popular  Treatise  on  the  Winds 8vo.  4  oo 

Haines's  American  Railway  Management i2mo,  2  50 

ITott's  Composition,  Digestibility,  and  Nutritive  Value  of  Food.  Mounted  chart,  i   25 

Fallacy  of  the  Present  Theory  of  Sound i6mo,  i  oo 

Ricketts's  History  of  Rensselaer  Polytechnic  Institute,  1824-1894.  .Small  8vo,  3  oo 

Rostoski's  Serum  Diagnosis.     (Bolduan.) i2mo,  i  oo 

Rotherham's  Emphasized  New  Testament Large  8vo,  2  oo 

Steel's  Treatise  on  the  Diseases  of  the  Dog • 8vo,  3  50 

Totten's  Important  Question  in  Metrology 8vo,  2  50 

The  World's  Columbian  Exposition  of  1893 4*0,  i  oo 

Von  Behring's  Suppression  of  Tuberculosis.     (Bolduan.) i2mo,  i  oo 

Winslow's  Elements  of  Applied  Microscopy i2mo,  i   50 

Worcester  and  Atkinson.      Small  Hospitals,  Establishment  and  Maintenance; 

Suggestions  for  Hospital  Architecture :  Plans  for  Small  Hospital  i2mo,  i   25 

HEBREW  AND   CHALDEE  TEXT-BOOKS. 

Green's  Elementary  Hebrew  Grammar i2mo,  i  25 

Hebrew  Chrestomathy 8vo,  2  oo 

Gesenius's  Hebrew  and  Chaldee  Lexicon  to  the  Qld  Testament  Scriptures. 

(Tregelles.) Small  4to,  half  morocco,  5  oo 

Lettews's  Hebrew  Bible 8vo»  2  25 

16 


UNIVERSITY  OF  TORONTO 

DEPARTMENT  OP  CIVIL  ENGINEERING 

Mnuicipr.l    and    Structural 


QA  Martin,   Louis  Adolphe 

807  Text-book  of  mechanics.     1st  ed< 

M38  v.l 

v.l 

P&AScLt 


PLEASE  DO  NOT  REMOVE 
CARDS  OR  SLIPS  FROM  THIS  POCKET 

UNIVERSITY  OF  TORONTO  LIBRARY